Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation · 2019-04-04 · Work Restrictions Specifications and...

Project Manual for

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23

Renovation 115 Parkway Forest Drive, Toronto, ON

SBA Project No. A18010

February 19th, 2019 Issued for Permit and Tender

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 00 01 05 Toronto, ON LIST OF SPECIFICATION SECTIONS, DRAWINGS AND SCHEDULE SBA Project No. A18010 Page 1 Company (Author) Abbreviations: Stevens Burgess Architects Ltd. – SBA Jablonsky, Ast and Partners Consulting Engineers – JAP GPY + Associates Engineering Inc. -- GPY HCC Engineering - HCC SPECIFICATION SECTIONS

DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

Section Title Author Pages 00 01 05 List of Specification Sections, Drawings and

Schedules SBA 4

00 01 07 00 31 13

Seals Sheet Preliminary Schedule

SBA SBA

1 2

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 14 00 01 19 00 01 21 00 01 22 10

Work Restrictions Specifications and Documents Allowances Contract Unit Prices

SBA SBA SBA SBA

2 4 2 2

01 31 00 01 32 00 01 33 00 01 35 23

Project Managing and Coordination Construction Progress Documentation Submittal Procedures Health and Safety

SBA SBA SBA SBA

4 3

6 3

01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements SBA 1 01 45 00 01 51 00

Quality Control Temporary Utilities

SBA SBA

4 3

01 52 00 Construction Facilities SBA 2 01 53 00 Temporary Construction SBA 2 01 61 00 01 73 30 01 74 00 01 78 10 01 78 36

Product Requirements Cutting and Patching Cleaning and Waste Processing Closeout Submittals Warranties

SBA SBA SBA SBA SBA

4 4 2 5 1

DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

06 20 00 Finish Carpentry SBA 5 DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE

PROTECTION

07 61 13 Canopy Roofing and Accessories SBA 6 07 92 00 Joint Sealants SBA 6

DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 00 01 05 Toronto, ON LIST OF SPECIFICATION SECTIONS, DRAWINGS AND SCHEDULE SBA Project No. A18010 Page 2 08 11 13 Metal Doors and Frames SBA 7 08 41 13 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts SBA 11 08 54 10 Fibreglass Windows SBA 6 08 71 00 Door Hardware SBA 4

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

09 21 16 Gypsum Board SBA 8 09 22 16 Interior Non-load Bearing Metal Stud

Framing SBA 5

09 30 00 Tiling and Cleaning SBA 5 09 65 10 Resilient Flooring SBA 6 09 91 00 Paint and Coatings

SBA 8

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALITIES

10 28 14 Toilet and Bath Accessories SBA 2 DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

26 05 00 Electrical General Conditions HCC 7 26 05 01 Common Work Results- Electrical HCC 4 26 05 20 Wire and Box Connectors (0-1000V) HCC 1 26 05 21 Wire and Cables HCC 3 26 05 27 Grounding HCC 2 26 05 31 Splitter, Junction Boxes, Pull Boxes and

Cabinets HCC 2

26 05 32 Outlet and Conduit boxes and Fittings HCC 2 26 05 34 Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit

Fittings HCC 3

26 05 34.01 Fastenings and Supports HCC 2 26 05 43 Direct Buried Underground Cable Ducts HCC 1 26 05 44 Installation of Cables in Trenches and in

Ducts HCC 2

26 27 26 Wiring Devices HCC 2 26 28 13.01 Fuses- Low Voltage HCC 2 26 28 23 Disconnect Switches- Fused and Non-Fused HCC 1 26 50 00 Lighting HCC 2 26 60 01 Electrical Identification HCC 3 26 60 02 Testing and Commissioning of Electrical

Systems HCC 5

28 13 00 Access Control and CCTV System HCC 1 28 31 00.01 Multiplex Fire Alarm System- Base Building HCC 19 Panel Schedule HCC 9 LIST OF DRAWINGS

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 00 01 05 Toronto, ON LIST OF SPECIFICATION SECTIONS, DRAWINGS AND SCHEDULE SBA Project No. A18010 Page 3 DRAWING NO TITLE AUTHOR DATE ARCHITECTURAL A100 A200 A201 A202 A300 A400 A401 A700

Drawing List, OBC Matrix, Fire Resistance Rating and Construction Assemblies Floor Plan – Existing and Proposed Detail Plan, Washroom Details and Millwork Details Door and Hardware Schedule and Millwork Details Reflected Ceiling Plan – Existing and Proposed Entrance Canopy Details Window Schedule and Details Finishes Schedule

SBA SBA SBA SBA SBA SBA/JAP SBA SBA

Feb, 19 2019 Feb 19, 2019 Feb 19, 2019 Feb 19, 2019 Feb 19, 2019 Feb 19, 2019 Feb 19, 2019 Feb 19, 2019

MECHANICAL M100 M101 M102 M200 M201 M300 M301

Mechanical Specs, Legend & Drawing List Mechanical Schedules Mechanical Details Plumbing Demolition Plan Plumbing New Plan HVAC Demolition Plan HVAC New Plan

GPY GPY GPY GPY GPY GPY GPY

Feb 19, 2019 Feb 19, 2019 Feb 19, 2019 Feb 19, 2019 Feb 19, 2019 Feb 19, 2019 Feb 19, 2019

ELECTRICAL E-1.1

Electrical Legend and Details

HCC

Feb 19, 2019

E-1.2 Electrical Details HCC Feb 19, 2019 E-1.3 Electrical Details HCC Feb 19, 2019 E-1.4 Electrical Details HCC Feb 19, 2019 E-1.5 Electrical Details HCC Feb 19, 2019 E-1.6 Electrical Details HCC Feb 19, 2019 E-2.1 Electrical Plan – 1st Floor HCC Feb 19, 2019 E-2.2 E-3.1 E-3.2 E-3.3 E- 4.1 E-5.1 E-5.2 E-6.1

Electrical Plan – 2nd Floor and Mechanical Level Reflected Ceiling Plan – 1st Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan – 2nd Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan – Mechanical Level Electrical Grounding System Details Electrical Demolition Plan – 1st Floor Electrical Demolition Plan – 2nd Floor and Mechanical Level Reflected Ceiling Demolition Plan – 1st Floor

HCC HCC HCC HCC HCC HCC HCC HCC

Feb 19, 2019 Feb 19, 2019 Feb 19, 2019 Feb 19, 2019 Feb 19, 2019 Feb 19, 2019 Feb 19, 2019 Feb 19, 2019

E-6.2

Reflected Ceiling Demolition Plan – 2nd Floor and Mechanical Level

HCC

Feb 19, 2019

E-7.1 Electrical Single Line Diagram HCC Feb 19, 2019

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 00 01 05 Toronto, ON LIST OF SPECIFICATION SECTIONS, DRAWINGS AND SCHEDULE SBA Project No. A18010 Page 4 E-7.2

Electrical Single Line Diagram Details HCC Feb 19, 2019

SCHEDULES Schedule No. 1: Designated Substances Survey Report: Toronto Fire Services Station 115 and TPS Station 23. Prepared by Pinchin Ltd. for City of Toronto, dated December 8, 2017

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 00 01 07 Toronto, ON SEALS SHEET SBA Project No. A18010 Page 1

SEALS SHEET PROJECT TITLE: Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation PROJECT LOCATION: 115 Parkway Forest Drive, Toronto, ON SBA PROJECT NUMBER: A18010

Architectural

Electrical

END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 00 31 13 Toronto, ON PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE SBA Project No. A18010 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK .1 Architectural and Structural:

.1 Cutting and Patching: .1 Remove and make good of concrete floor to suit new sanitary. .2 Remove interior wall, ceiling, floor finishes, doors, windows,

kitchen millwork and washroom vanity as noted. .3 Make good of all ceiling and wall, ensure all existing building

envelope (insulation and vapour barrier) is maintained. .2 Structural Steel and Entrance Canopy:

.1 New structural steel and components.

.2 New entrance canopy complete with flashing, fascia, integral gutter, downspout and rain water leaders.

.3 Make good of existing stone veneer and mortar at obsolete light fixture location and new counter flashing.

.4 Paint all exposed steel components.

.5 New light fixtures. .3 Finish Carpentry:

.1 Remove existing kitchen millwork and vanities.

.2 New kitchen millwork and vanities.

.3 Refinish existing wood stools. .4 Doors and Windows:

.1 New metal doors and roll up doors.

.2 Replace two (2) sections of each existing garage door with full height insulated glazed units. Refer to Section 01 21 00 – Allowance.

.3 New aluminum frame entrance door and screen system complete with glazing, flashing and sealants. Make good of adjacent wall, ceiling and sill.

.4 New fibreglass windows complete with hardware, glazing, flashing and sealants. Make good of adjacent wall, ceiling and sill.

.5 Door Hardware (Refer to Section 01 21 00 – Allowance): .1 Retain Architectural Hardware Consultant to develop door

hardware schedule. .2 Install door hardware as per approved schedule, including

modification of existing doors to suit new hardware. .6 Finishes:

.1 New interior wall.

.2 Clean existing porcelain wall and floor tiles.


.3 New porcelain wall and floor tiles (Refer to Section 01 21 00 – Allowance)

.4 Repair existing floor tiles in Foyer 103 and wall tiles in shower.

.5 New resilient floor tiles and wall base at stairs and Gym 210.

.6 Paint all walls, ceiling, soffit, doors, frames, stairs, entrance canopy and lintel, and exposed conduits and ducts.

.7 Miscellaneous: .1 New plumbing and accessories to complete Universal Toilet Room

107A, including new steel support for adjustable change table.

.2 Mechanical:

.1 Ground Floor Plumbing: .1 Replace existing lavatories with new c/w faucet - Total of 2 .2 Remove existing Mop sink and provide new at the new location .3 Remove existing eye wash station and reinstall at the new location .4 Remove existing washing machine and install it at the new

location .5 Replace existing kitchen sink with new c/w faucet .6 Remove portion of existing flue and intake air vent for the furnaces

and provide new piping to suit new furnaces. .7 Remove portion of existing Gas line serving furnaces inside the

mechanical room. Provide new gas piping to suit new installation. .8 Provide new Barrier Free Toilet and Lavatory as per plans. .9 Provide new RP backflow preventer type c/w with quick

connection to suit truck fill connection. .10 Provide new CW & HW piping and distribute to new and relocated

plumbing fixtures as shown on the floor plans. .11 Provide new buried Sanitary drain line and connect to existing as

shown on the floor plans. .12 Provide new Sanitary vent piping and connect to existing

.2 Second Floor Plumbing:

.1 Replace existing lavatories with new c/w faucet - Total of 2

.2 Remove existing Mop sink and provide new c/w faucet.

.3 Ground Floor HVAC: .1 Replace existing supply, return and exhaust air grilles with new .2 Remove existing Furnaces and provide new .3 Remove existing refrigerant lines and provided new refrigerant

lines. .4 Remove existing CU units and provide new CU units .5 Replace existing Garage exhaust fan with new fan


.6 Provide new exhaust and supply air duct as indicated on the drawings.

.7 Provide new supply air diffusers.

.8 Provide new humidifiers by-pass type to replace the existing ones.

.4 Second Floor HVAC: .1 Replace existing supply, return and exhaust air grilles with new

.3 Electrical:

.1 Replace existing electrical distribution with new.

.2 Provide additional electrical distribution to accommodate the new design requirements.

.3 Recircuit existing to remain devices to new distribution.

.4 Provide temporary generator and temporary distribution to minimize length of power interruptions.

.5 Provide new OBC 2012 compliant single stage addressable fire alarm system complete with initiating devices and signalling devices.

.6 Replace existing lighting with new LED fixtures.

.7 Provide SB10 compliant lighting controls (occupancy sensors, digital switches, timer switches, etc).

.8 Provide new exit signs and emergency lighting throughout the facility.

.9 Provide a comprehensive coordination study and arc flash analysis and post PPE labels

1.2 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Prepare a progress schedule taking into consideration the following.

.2 Execute Work to cause minimum interference with adjacent residential properties and maintain maximum safety of residents and the public. Take reasonable measures to eliminate the spread of noise, dirt and dust during Work from the site to surrounding areas.

.3 Fire Hall is expected to be operational 24 hours during construction. EMS station will be vacated during the construction period, however there may be times when the need may arise for EMS staff to access facility. Contractor is to accommodate these requests and make all necessary precautions to ensure the safety of all occupants.

.4 Construction is to be phased by floor and within each phase, area of work may be further phased to accommodate fire hall operation. Contractor to submit phasing plans for consultants and fire crews’ review prior to construction.

.5 Hours of work is Monday to Friday, from 7am to 6pm. All utility and building system shall be in working order during hours of work to maintain Fire Hall operation. Exits are to be kept free and clear with minimum interruption.

.6 After hours of work, it is Contractor’s responsibility to maintain working order for all utility and building systems to ensure Fire Hall operation. Exits are to be kept


free and clear and area of work shall also be cleaned and suitable for fire crews to use.

.7 Work carried out shall not affect Fire Hall’s ongoing use and occupancy of the site. All work to be scheduled to eliminate or minimize disruption to Fire Hall’s operations. Contract Price includes all necessary overtime premium costs and costs to work statutory holidays, to ensure orderly progression of work and continuous operation of the Fire Hall facility.

.8 Owner will move out personal items, however it is Contractor’s responsibility to protect remaining equipment and furnishings in area of work. Make good all damage to the satisfaction of the Owner. Relocate all furnishings, equipment and effects remaining in rooms to execute the Work, and return same to original location before Owner re-occupy rooms or spaces.

.9 During power switch over, arrangements for shut down of Owner’s utility and building systems which may affect Fire Hall (interruption of service) will be mutually arranged between the Owner and the Contractor. No shutdown to occur without the prior written consent of the Owner. Provide minimum 48 hours advance notice of any required shutdown of an Owner’s system, either in whole or in part.

.10 Consult with Owner and Consultants in developing Project and Progress Schedules so the Work will cause minimum interference with Fire Hall operation.

.11 Fire truck route shall be maintained open and free and clear from any construction activities.

1.3 PROJECT SCHEDULE .1 The following is the Preliminary Project Schedule:

ACTIVITY/MILESTONE DATE Project Tendered To be confirmed by

Owner Project Awarded/Start-up Substantial Completion

Part 2 Products (Not Used)

Part 3 Execution (Not Used)

END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS 23 Station Renovation Section 01 14 00 Toronto, ON WORK RESTRICTIONS SBA Project No. A18010 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Connecting to existing services.

.2 Special scheduling and phasing requirements.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

.2 Section 01 53 00 - Temporary Construction.

.3 This section describes requirements applicable to all Sections within Divisions 02 to 49.

1.3 EXISTING SERVICES .1 Notify City and utility companies of intended interruption of services and obtain

required permission.

.2 Where Work involves breaking into or connecting to existing services, give City forty-eight (48) hours of notice for necessary interruption of mechanical or electrical service throughout course of work.

.1 Keep duration of interruptions minimum.

.2 Perform interruptions after normal working hours of occupants, preferably on weekends.

1.4 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Any noise generating work to be completed in compliance with City of Toronto’s

Noise By-laws.

.2 Execute Work to cause minimum interference with adjacent commercial and residential properties and maintain maximum safety of residents and the public. Take reasonable measures to eliminate the spread of noise, dirt and dust during Work from the site to surrounding areas.

.3 Submit schedule of special requirements or disruptions in accordance with Section 01 33 00.



END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS 23 Station Renovation Section 01 19 00 Toronto, ON SPECIFICATIONS AND DOCUMENTS SBA Project No. A18010 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Words and terms.

.2 Complementary documents.

.3 Precedence of documents.

.4 Specification grammar.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 This section describes requirements applicable to all sections within Divisions 02

to 49.

1.3 DEFINITIONS .1 Conform to definitions and their defined meanings in the Agreement and

Definitions portion of CCDC 2 for supplementary words and terms.

.2 The following words and terms are applicable to the Contract Documents for this project:

.3 Addendum: A document that amends the Bid Documents during the Bidding Period and becomes part of the Contract Documents when a Contract is executed. (Plural: Addenda).

.4 Agreement: The signed and sealed legal instrument binding parties in a Contract, describing in strict terms their mutual arrangement, roles and responsibilities, commencement, and completion responsibilities.

.5 Alternative Price: The amount stipulated by a Bidder for an Alternative and stated as an addition, a deduction, or no change to the Bid Price.

.6 Bid: To offer as a Bid stating for what price a Contractor will assume a Contract.

.7 Bid Documents: A set of documents consisting of the Instructions to Bidders, Bid Forms, Contract Documents, and other information issued for the benefit of Bidders to prepare and submit a Bid.

.8 Bid Form: The specific and detailed form used to collect information about a Bid.

.9 Bidding: The process of preparing and submitting a Bid.

.10 Construction Documents: The Drawings and Project Manual. When combined with a Contract and Contract conditions, these documents form the Contract Documents.

.11 Contingency Allowance: An additional monetary amount added to a Project cost estimate and designated to cover unpredictable or unforeseen items of Work. The amount is usually based on some percentage of the estimated cost and expended and adjusted by Change Order. It is not intended to cover additions to the scope of Work.


.12 Cost Plus Contract: A Contract under which a Contractor is reimbursed for the direct and indirect costs for the performance of a Contract and, in addition, is paid a Fee for services. The Fee is usually stated as a stipulated price or as a percentage of cost.

.13 General Conditions: That part of the Contract Documents which sets forth many of the rights, responsibilities and relationships of the parties involved in a Contract.

.14 Instructions To Bidders: Instructions contained in the Bid Documents to convey an Owner's expectations and criteria associated with submitting a Bid.

.15 Section: A portion of a Project Specification covering one or more segments of the total Work or requirements. Sections are included in a Project manual as required to meet Project requirements.

.16 Standard: A document describing a grade or a level of quality, which has been established by a recognized agency or organization, utilizing an internal voting process.

.17 Separate Price: A separate price for Work to be added to the base price if selected by the Owner. This price type is not a part of the base bid price.

.18 Stipulated Price: An amount set forth in a Stipulated Price Contract as the total payment for the performance of the Work. Sometimes referred to as a stipulated sum or a lump sum stipulated price.

.19 Tender: A term that was formally abandoned by CCDC and the Canadian Construction industry in the early 1980's in favour of the preferred term Bid.

.20 Unit Price: The amount payable for a single unit of Work as stated in a Schedule of Prices.

.21 Install: To remove from site storage, move or transport to intended location, install in position, connect to utilities, repair site caused damage, and make ready for use.

.22 Supply: To acquire or purchase, ship or transport to the site, unload, remove packaging to permit inspection for damage, re-package, replace damaged items, and safely store on-site.

1.4 SPECIFICATION FORMAT .1 Specifications are not intended as a detailed description of installation methods

but serve to indicate particular requirements to insure the performance of the completed work.

.2 Material shown or specified on Drawings or in Specifications, unless otherwise specified, shall conform to standards designated in Ontario Building Code. Similarly, unless otherwise specified, installation methods and standards of workmanship shall also conform to standards required by the Ontario Building Code.


.3 Parts of specification are written in short form, therefore it is understood that where a component of Work is sated in heading followed by a material or operation, “shall be”, shall consist of” or similar words or phrases are implied which denote complete supply and installation of such material or operations for component of Work designated by heading.

.4 Division 1 of the specifications shall be read into and form part of each Section of the Specifications.

.5 The contract documents are to be interpreted as a whole, although they are arranged in divisions and section for convenience and clarity. The Contractor is responsible for all the Work, regardless of the division of the Work in the contract documents, and such division does not impose any obligation on the Consultant or upon the City as arbiters to establish limits or responsibility between the Contractor and the subcontractors.

1.5 COMPLEMENTARY DOCUMENTS .1 Generally, drawings indicate graphically, the dimensions and location of

components and equipment. Specifications indicate specific components, assemblies, and identify quality.

.2 Drawings, specifications, diagrams and schedules are complementary, each to the other, and what is required by one, to be binding as if required by all.

.3 Should any conflict or discrepancy appear between documents, which leaves doubt as to the intent or meaning, apply the Precedence of Documents article below or obtain guidance or direction from Consultant.

.4 Examine all discipline drawings, specifications, schedules, diagrams and related Work to ensure that Work can be satisfactorily executed.

.5 All specification sections of the Project Manual and Drawings are affected by requirements of Division 01 sections.

1.6 PRECEDENCE OF DOCUMENTS .1 In the event of conflict within and between the Contract Documents, the order of

priority within specifications and drawings for this Project are - from highest to lowest:

.1 the Agreement and Definitions between the Owner and the Contractor;

.2 the Defined Terms/Definitions;

.3 Supplementary Conditions;

.4 the General Conditions;

.5 Sections of Division 01 of the specifications;

.6 Sections of Divisions 02 through 49 of the specifications.

.7 Schedules and Keynotes: .1 Material and finishing schedules within the specifications, then; .2 Material and finishing schedules on drawings, then; .3 Keynotes and definitions thereto, then;

.8 Diagrams.


.9 Drawings: .1 Drawings of larger scale shall govern over those of smaller scale

of the same date, then; .2 Dimensions shown on drawings shall govern over dimensions

scaled from drawings, then; .3 Location of utility outlets indicated on architectural detail drawings

takes precedence over positions or mounting heights located on mechanical or electrical Drawings.

.10 Later dated documents shall govern over earlier documents of the same type.

.2 In the event of conflict between documents, the decision of the Consultant shall be final.

1.7 SPECIFICATION GRAMMAR .1 Specifications are written in the imperative (command) mode, in an abbreviated

form.

.2 Imperative language of the technical sections is always directed to the Contractor identified as a primary constructor, as sole executor of the Contract, unless specifically noted otherwise.

.1 This form of imperative (command) mode statement requires the primary constructor to perform such action or Work.

.2 Perform all requirements of the Contract Documents whether stated imperatively or otherwise.

.3 Division of the Work among subcontractors, suppliers, or others is solely the prime constructor's responsibility. The Consultant(s) and specification authors assume no responsibility to function or act as an arbiter to establish subcontract scope or limits between sections or divisions of Work.



END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 01 21 00 Toronto, ON ALLOWANCES SBA Project No. A18010 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Cash allowances.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 This section describes requirements applicable to all Sections within Divisions 02

to 49.

1.3 CASH ALLOWANCES .1 Allowance for Supply of Architectural Hardware $ 15,000.00

• To cover fees to retain Architectural Hardware Consultant to develop door hardware schedule.

• To cover supply of door hardware as per developed door hardware schedule. Installation of door hardware is part of base bid.

.2 Allowance for Supply of Porcelain Tiles $ 15,000.00

• To cover supply of porcelain tiles only. Installation and supply of other material to complete scope of work is part of base bid.

.3 Allowance for Miscellaneous Conduit and Wire Relocation $ 8,000.00

• To trace, remove, rework and refeed existing conduit systems, branch circuits and lighting circuits, not identified on the drawings, but interfering with the construction.

• This cash allowance is for addressing electrical conduit and wiring systems interfering with the construction. All other conduit and wiring systems scopes of work shown on the drawings and detailed in the specifications including removing all abandoned conduits, relocating, reworking and refeeding existing systems and devices shall be included as part of the base bid price over and above the stated cash allowance value.

.4 Allowance for Supply of Garage Door Sections $ 20,000.00

• Scope of work is to replace two (2) sections of each existing five (5) garage doors with full glazing sections. Replace springs to accommodate final door weight. New sections are to match existing to ensure compatibility. This cash allowance is for supply of new sections and springs only. Installation to complete scope of work is part of base bid.

.5 Allowance for Auto-CAD files $ 750.00

• Refer to Section 26 05 00 Electrical General Conditions

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 01 21 00 Toronto, ON ALLOWANCES SBA Project No. A18010 Page 2 1.4 INSPECTING AND TESTING ALLOWANCE

.1 Costs included in Concrete Inspecting and Testing Allowance if applicable: Cost of engaging an inspecting or testing agency; execution of inspecting and tests; and reporting results.

.2 Costs not included in the Inspecting and Testing Allowance but included in the Contract Price:

.1 Costs of incidental labour and facilities required to assist inspecting or testing agency.

.2 Costs of testing services used by Contractor separate from Contract Document requirements.

.3 Costs of retesting upon failure of previous tests as determined by Consultant.

.3 Payment Procedures:

.1 Submit one (1) copy of the Concrete Inspection and Testing invoice with next application for payment.

.2 Pay invoice on approval by Consultant.

.4 Differences in cost will be adjusted by Change Order.



END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS 23 Station Renovation Section 01 22 10 Toronto, ON CONTRACT UNIT PRICES SBA Project No. A18010 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Quantity measurement with unit value of products determined by and expanded

in the Bid Documents.

.2 Schedule of products and their quantities.

.3 Schedule of applicable values.

1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES .1 Revise Schedule of Values to list approved Change Orders, with each

Application for Payment.

1.3 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES .1 Measurement Devices:

.1 Weigh Scales: Inspected, tested and certified by the applicable authority for weights and measures, within the past year.

.2 Platform Scales: Of sufficient size and capacity to accommodate the conveying vehicle.

.3 Metering Devices: Inspected, tested and certified by the applicable authority within the past year.

.2 Measurement by Weight: Concrete reinforcing steel, rolled or formed steel or other metal shapes - measured by handbook weights. Welded assemblies measured by handbook or scale weight.

.3 Measurement by Volume: Measured by cubic dimension using mean length, width and height or thickness.

.4 Measurement by Area: Measured by square dimension using mean length and width or radius.

.5 Linear Measurement: Measured by linear dimension, at the item centerline or mean chord.

.6 Stipulated Sum/Price Measurement: Items measured by weight, volume, area, or linear means or combination as appropriate, as a completed item or unit of Work.

1.4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT - UNIT PRICES .1 Authority for Specified Conditions: Measurement methods are delineated in the

individual specification sections.

.2 Authority for Changed Conditions: Measurement methods and unit prices are determined by the Consultant.

.3 Take measurements and compute quantities. The Consultant will verify measurements and quantities.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS 23 Station Renovation Section 01 22 10 Toronto, ON CONTRACT UNIT PRICES SBA Project No. A18010 Page 2

.4 Unit Quantities: Quantities and measurements indicated in the Bid Form are for bid and contract purposes only. Quantities and measurements actually supplied or placed in the Work shall determine payment.

1.5 DEFECT ASSESSMENT .1 Replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to specified

requirements.

.2 If, in the opinion of the Consultant, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the Consultant may direct one of the following two (2) remedies:

.1 The defective Work may remain, but the unit sum/price will be adjusted to a new sum/price at the discretion of the Consultant.

.2 The defective Work will be partially repaired to the instructions of the Consultant; the unit sum/price will be adjusted to a new sum/price at the discretion of the Consultant.

.3 The individual specification sections may modify these options or may identify a specific formula or percentage sum/price reduction.

.4 The authority of the Consultant to assess the defect and identify payment adjustment is final.

1.6 NON-PAYMENT FOR REJECTED PRODUCTS .1 Payment will not be made for any of the following:

.1 Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable.

.2 Products determined as unacceptable before or after placement.

.3 Products not completely unloaded from the transporting vehicle.

.4 Products placed beyond the lines and levels of the required Work.

.5 Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work.

.6 Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected Products.



END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 01 31 00 Toronto, ON PROJECT MANAGING AND COORDINATION SBA Project No. A18010 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 01 32 00 - Construction Progress Documentation.

.2 Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.


1.2 COORDINATION .1 Perform coordination of progress schedules, submittals, use of site, temporary

utilities, construction facilities and construction Work, with progress of Work of sub-contractors.

1.3 CONSTRUCTION ORGANIZATION AND START-UP .1 Within two (2) weeks of Contract Award or as requested by City, request a

meeting of parties in contract to discuss and resolve administrative procedures and responsibilities.

.2 Consultant, Owner/City, senior representatives of the Contractor, major Subcontractors, field inspectors and supervisors are to be in attendance.

.3 Establish time and location of meeting and notify parties concerned minimum five (5) days before meeting.

.4 Incorporate mutually agreed variations to Contract Documents into Agreement, prior to signing.

.5 Consultant to provide Agenda including following:

.1 Appointment of official representative or participants in Work.

.2 Schedule of Work, progress scheduling as specified in Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Documentation.

.3 Schedule of submission of shop drawings, samples, colour chips as specified in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

.4 Requirements for temporary facilities, site sign, offices, storage sheds, utilities, fences as specified in Section 01 51 00 – Temporary Utilities, Section 01 52 00 – Construction Facilities and Section 01 53 00 – Temporary Construction.

.5 Delivery schedule of specified equipment and materials as specified in Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Documentation.

.6 Site safety and security.

.7 Proposed changes, change orders, procedures, approvals required, mark-up percentages permitted, time extensions, overtime, and administrative requirements.

.8 Record drawings as specified in Section 01 78 10 – Closeout Submittals.

.9 Maintenance material and data as specified in Section 01 78 10 – Closeout Submittals.


.10 Take-over procedures, acceptance, and warranties as specified Section 01 78 10 – Closeout Submittals.

.11 Monthly progress claims, administrative procedures, photographs, and holdbacks.

.12 Insurances and copies of policies.

.6 Comply with extent of Staging Compound, indicated on site plan for Final Location, for storage of materials/tools, electrical generator, sanitary facilities and contractor parking.

.7 Contractor to arrange and provide for any required water. No water to be drained into City catch basins/sewers. All discarded water to be removed off site and legally disposed of.

.8 Coordinate field engineering and layout Work with City.

.9 Contractor to preside at meetings, produce and distribute minutes subsequent to the Start-up Meeting. Consultant to provide Agenda and Minutes for Start-up Meeting.

1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS .1 Schedule and administer bi-weekly project meetings throughout progress of

Work or as determined by City and/or Consultant.

.2 Schedule and administer pre-installation meetings when specified in sections and when required to coordinate related or affected Work.

.3 Prepare agenda for meetings.

.4 Distribute written notice of each meeting five (5) days in advance of meeting date to Consultant and Owner.

.5 Coordinate location, physical space and arrangements for meetings with City.

.6 Preside at meetings.

.7 Record minutes. Include significant proceedings and decisions. Identify action by parties.

.8 Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within five (5) days after each meeting and transmit to meeting participants, affected parties not in attendance and Owner/City and Consultant.

.9 Agenda to include:

.1 Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting.

.2 Review of Work progress since previous meeting.

.3 Field observations, problems, conflicts.

.4 Problems which impede construction schedule.

.5 Review of off-site fabrication delivery schedules.

.6 Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule.

.7 Revisions to construction schedule.

.8 Progress schedule, during succeeding Work period.

.9 Review submittal schedules: expedite as required.


.10 Maintenance of quality standards.

.11 Review proposed changes for effect on construction schedule and on completion date.

.12 Review site safety and security issues.

.13 Other business.

1.5 ON-SITE DOCUMENTS .1 Maintain at job site, one copy each of the following:

.1 Contract drawings.

.2 Specifications.

.3 Addenda.

.4 Reviewed shop drawings.

.5 Change orders.

.6 Other modifications to Contract.

.7 Field test reports.

.8 Copy of approved Work Schedule.

.9 Manufacturers' installation and application instructions.

.10 Labour conditions and wage schedules.

.11 Applicable current editions of municipal regulations and by-laws. Current building codes, complete with addenda bulletins applicable to the Place of the Work.

1.6 SCHEDULES .1 Submit preliminary construction progress schedule as specified in Section

01 32 00 – Construction Progress Documentation to Consultant coordinated with Consultant's Project schedule.

.2 After review, revise and resubmit schedule to comply with revised Project schedule.

.3 During progress of Work revise and resubmit as directed by Consultant.

1.7 SUBMITTALS .1 Prepare and issue submittals to Consultant for review.

.2 Submit preliminary Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples as specified in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures for review for compliance with Contract Documents; for field dimensions and clearances, for relation to available space, and for relation to Work of other contracts. After review, revise and resubmit for transmittal to Consultant.

.3 Submit requests for payment for review, and for transmittal to Consultant.

.4 Submit requests for interpretation of Contract Documents, and obtain instructions through Consultant.

.5 Process substitutions through Consultant.

.6 Process change orders through Consultant.


.7 Deliver closeout submittals for review and preliminary inspections, for transmittal to Consultant.

1.8 COORDINATION DRAWINGS .1 Provide information required by Consultant for preparation of coordination

Drawings.

.2 Review and approve revised Drawings for submittal to Consultant.

1.9 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES .1 Notify Consultant when Work is considered ready for Substantial Performance.

.2 Accompany Consultant on preliminary inspection to determine items listed for completion or correction.

.3 Comply with Consultant's instructions for correction of items of Work listed in executed certificate of Substantial Performance and for access to Owner-occupied areas.

.4 Notify Consultant of instructions for completion of items of Work determined in Consultant's final inspection.



END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 01 32 00 Toronto, ON CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SBA Project No. A18010 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Schedules, form, content, submission.

.2 Construction progress scheduling.

.3 Progress photographs.

.4 Submittals schedule.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Schedules, form, content, submission.

.2 Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures


1.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULES .1 Include schedule for submitting shop drawings, product data, samples and mock-

ups.

.2 Indicate dates for submitting, review time, resubmission time, and last date for meeting fabrication schedule.

.3 Include dates when delivery will be required for Owner-furnished products.

.4 Submit schedules as follows:

.1 Submittal Schedule for Shop Drawings and Product Data.

.2 Submittal Schedule for Samples.

.3 Product Delivery Schedule.

.4 Cash Allowance Schedule for acquiring Products only or Products and Installation, or Installation only.

.5 Shutdown or closure activity.

.5 Format of Schedule:

.1 Prepare schedule in form of a horizontal bar chart.

.2 Provide a separate bar for each major item of work.

.3 Split horizontally for projected and actual performance.

.4 Provide horizontal time scale identifying first Working Day of each week.

.5 Format for listings: Chronological order of start of each item of Work.

.6 Identification of listings: By Specification Section numbers, systems description and/or specification subjects as confirmed with Consultant.

.6 Submission of Submittal Schedules:

.1 Submit Submittal Schedules within two (2) weeks of Contract award at same time as submission of Construction Schedule.


.2 Submit schedules in electronic format, forward through e-mail as pdf files.

.3 Consultant will review schedule and return reviewed copy within five (5) days after receipt.

.4 Resubmit finalized schedule within five (5) days after return of review copy.

.5 Submit revised progress schedule with each application for payment.

.6 Distribute copies of revised schedule to: .1 Job site office. .2 Subcontractors. .3 Other concerned parties.

.7 Instruct recipients to report to Contractor within five (5) days, any problems anticipated by timetable shown in schedule.

1.4 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULING .1 Submit Construction Schedule as noted above.

.2 Revise and resubmit as required.

.3 Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since previous version.

.4 Submit a horizontal bar/Gantt computer generated chart with separate line for each major portion of Work or operation/section of Work, identifying first Work day of each week.

.5 Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration.

.6 Provide a separate bar for approved base line and progress line for each item.

.7 Split progress line horizontally for projected and actual performance.

.8 Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission.

.9 Indicate submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, samples, and product delivery dates, including those furnished by Owner and required by Allowances.

.10 Progress schedule to include scheduling of mock-ups, Consultant reviews and correction of deficiencies.

.11 Indicate projected percentage of completion of each item as of first day of month.

.12 Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission schedule.

.13 Indicate changes occurring since previous submission of schedule:

.1 Major changes in scope.

.2 Activities modified since previous submission.

.3 Revised projections of progress and completion.

.4 Other identifiable changes.


.14 Provide a narrative report to define:

.1 Problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on schedule.

.2 Corrective action recommended and its effect.

.3 Effect of changes on schedules of other prime contractors.


END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 01 33 00 Toronto, ON SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SBA Project No. 18010 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Shop drawings and product data.

.2 Samples.

.3 Mock-ups

.4 Method Statements

.5 Certificates and transcripts.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 01 32 00 - Construction Progress Documentation.

.2 Section 01 78 10 - Closeout Submittals.

.3 Other sections requesting submittals.


1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE .1 Submit to Consultant submittals listed for review. Submit with reasonable

promptness and in orderly sequence so as to not cause delay in Work. Failure to submit in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for an extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed.

.2 Work affected by submittal shall not proceed until review is complete.

.3 Present Shop Drawings, product data, samples and mock-ups in SI (metric) units.

.4 Where items or information is not manufactured or produced in SI metric units, converted values within the imperial measurement tolerances acceptable.

.5 Review submittals prior to submission to Consultant. This review represents that necessary requirements have been determined and verified, or will be, and that each submittal has been checked and co-ordinated with requirements of Work and Contract Documents.

.6 Submittals not stamped, signed, dated, identified as to specific project, and attesting to their being reviewed will be returned without being examined and shall be considered rejected.

.7 Notify Consultant, in writing at time of submission, identifying deviations from requirements of Contract Documents stating reasons for deviations.

.8 Verify field measurements and affected adjacent Work are coordinated.

.9 Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submission is not relieved by Consultant's review of submittals.


.10 Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submission from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by Consultant review.

.11 Keep one (1) reviewed copy of each submission on site.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA .1 The term "Shop Drawings" means drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules,

performance charts, brochures and other data which are to be provided by Contractor to illustrate details of a portion of Work.

.2 Indicate materials, methods of construction and attachment or anchorage, erection diagrams, connections, explanatory notes and other information necessary for completion of Work. Where articles or equipment attach or connect to other articles or equipment, indicate that such items have been coordinated, regardless of Section under which adjacent items will be supplied and installed. Indicate cross references to design drawings and specifications.

.3 Allow ten (10) days for Consultant's review of each submission.

.4 Adjustments made on Shop Drawings by Consultant are not intended to change Contract Price. If adjustments affect value of Work, state such in writing to Consultant prior to proceeding with Work.

.5 Make changes in Shop Drawings as Consultant may require, consistent with Contract Documents. When resubmitting, notify Consultant in writing of any revisions other than those requested.

.6 Accompany submissions with transmittal letter, containing:

.1 Date.

.2 Project title and number.

.3 Contractor's name and address.

.4 Identification and quantity of each shop drawing, product data and sample.

.5 Other pertinent data.

.7 Submissions shall include:

.1 Date and revision dates.

.2 Project title and number.

.3 Name and address of: .1 Subcontractor. .2 Supplier. .3 Manufacturer.

.4 Contractor's stamp, signed by Contractor's authorized representative certifying approval of submissions, verification of field measurements and compliance with Contract Documents.

.5 Details of appropriate portions of Work as applicable: .1 Fabrication. .2 Layout, showing dimensions, including identified field dimensions,

and clearances.


.3 Setting or erection details.

.4 Capacities.

.5 Performance characteristics.

.6 Standards.

.7 Operating weight.

.8 Wiring diagrams.

.9 Single line and schematic diagrams.

.10 Relationship to other parts of the Work.

.8 After Consultant's review, distribute copies.

.9 Submit electronic copy of Shop Drawings for each requirement requested in specification Sections and as consultant may reasonably request.

.10 Submit electronic copy of product data sheets or brochures for requirements requested in specification sections and as requested by Consultant where Shop Drawings will not be prepared due to standardized manufacture of product.

.11 Delete information not applicable to project.

.12 Supplement standard information to provide details applicable to project.

.13 If upon review by Consultant, no errors or omissions are discovered or if only minor corrections are made, copies will be returned and fabrication and installation of Work may proceed. If Shop Drawings are rejected, noted copy will be returned and re-submission of corrected Shop Drawings, through same procedure indicated above, must be performed before fabrication and installation of Work may proceed.

.14 Shop drawings shall be prepared specifically for project shall be fully dimensioned. Use of standard drawings or brochures is acceptable only if accompanied by drawing showing product in assembled form and showing its relation to adjacent work, methods of anchorage, and other relevant information. Catalogue pages alone are not acceptable. All shop drawings must be to scale.

1.5 SAMPLES .1 Submit for review samples in triplicate as requested in respective specification

Sections. Label samples with origin and intended use.

.2 Deliver samples prepaid to Consultant's business address.

.3 Notify Consultant in writing, at time of submission of deviations in samples from requirements of Contract Documents.

.4 Where colour, pattern or texture is criterion, submit full range of samples.

.5 Adjustments made on samples by Consultant are not intended to change Contract Price. If adjustments affect value of Work, state such in writing to Consultant prior to proceeding with Work.

.6 Make changes in samples which Consultant may require, consistent with Contract Documents.

.7 Reviewed and accepted samples will become standard of workmanship and material against which installed Work will be verified.


.8 Keep all approved samples at Place of the Work. Maintain in good order and available to the Consultant and his or her representatives for the duration of the Work.

1.6 MOCK-UPS .1 Refer to Section 01 45 00 - Quality

1.7 CERTIFICATES AND TRANSCRIPTS .1 Immediately after award of Contract, submit Workers' Compensation Board

status.

.2 Submit transcription of insurance immediately after award of Contract

1.8 PRELIMINARY SUBMITTAL AND MOCK-UP CHECKLIST

Tim

ing Item Description of Submittal Specification

Reference No. Dates

1.0

With

B

id 1.1 Bid Form (2 copies, signed and sealed) Bid Form Feb, 2019

1.2 Addenda Inclusion Bid Form Feb, 2019 1.3 Appendices Inclusion Bid Form Feb, 2019

2.0

Bef

ore

Sign

ing 2.1 Bond as per City’s Requirement May 2019

3.0

1 w

eek

Afte

r Si

gnin

g

3.1 Proof of good standing with Workplace Safety and

Insurance Board of Workers Compensation Board - for General Contractor and all Subcontractors

01 33 00 May 2019

3.2 On-site Contingency and Emergency Response Plan 01 35 23 May 2019

3.3 Construction Progress Schedule Format G.C. 3.5 / 01 32 00 May 2019

4.0

1 w

eek

Afte

r Si

gnin

g

4.1 Schedule of Values May 2019

4.2 Schedule of Payment May 2019 4.3 Schedule of Site Meetings 01 31 00 May 2019 4.4 Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 00 May 2019 4.5 Submittal Schedule (Shop Drawings, Samples, Mock-Ups

etc.) 01 32 00 May 2019

4.6

General Contractor Method Statement and Staging Compound Layout

01 33 00

May 2019

4.7 'Notice of Project' in compliance with OHSA 01 35 23 May 2019

5.0

Prio

r to

Mob

iliza

tion

5.1 Health and Safety Plan 01 35 23 May 2019 5.2 MSDS Sheets 01 35 23 May 2019


6.1 Structural Steel Components - Shop Drawings Dwg A400 6.2 Finish Carpentry and Cabinets - Shop Drawings 06 20 00 6.3 Finish Carpentry and Cabinets - Product Data 06 20 00 6.4 Standing Seam Metal Roofing - Product Data 07 61 13 6.5 Standing Seam Metal Roofing - Shop Drawings 07 61 13 6.6 Standing Seam Metal Roofing - Samples 07 61 13 6.7 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim - Shop Drawings 07 62 00 6.8 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim - Samples 07 62 00 6.9 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim – Mock-Up 07 62 00

6.10 Joint Sealants - Product Data 07 92 00 6.11 Joint Sealants - Shop Drawings 07 92 00 6.12 Metal Doors and Frames - Product Data 08 11 13 6.13 Metal Doors and Frames - Shop Drawings and Doors

Schedules 08 11 13

6.14 Metal Doors and Frame- Garage Door Mock-Up 08 11 13 6.15 Glazed Aluminum Entrance Storefronts - Product Data 08 41 13 6.16 Glazed Aluminum Entrance Storefronts - Shop Drawings 08 41 13 6.17 Glazed Aluminum Entrance Storefronts - Test Reports 08 41 13 6.18 Glazed Aluminum Entrance Storefronts - Inspector Field

Reports 08 41 13

6.19 Fibreglass Windows- Product Data 08 54 10 6.20 Fibreglass Windows- Shop Drawings 08 54 10 6.21 Fibreglass Windows- Samples 08 54 10 6.22 Fibreglass Windows- Mock-Up 08 54 10 6.23

Finish Hardware - Name of Architectural Hardware Consultant

08 71 00

6.24 Finish Hardware - Hardware Schedule 08 71 00 6.25 Finish Hardware - Product Data 08 71 00 6.26 Finish Hardware - Shop Drawings and Cat. cut 08 71 00 6.27 Finish Hardware - Keying Schedule 08 71 00 6.28 Glazing - Product Data 08 80 50 6.29 Glazing - Shop Drawings 08 80 50 6.30 Glazing - Samples 08 80 50

6.31 Glazing – Certificates, Testing Report and IGMA Compliance Audit

08 80 50

6.32 Glazing – Mock-Up (as part of on site fiberglass window) 08 80 50 6.33 Tiling- Samples and Product Data 09 30 00 6.34 Tiling- Shop Drawing 09 30 00 6.35 Resilient Flooring- Samples and Product Data 09 65 10 6.36 Resilient Flooring- Manufacturer’s Installation Instruction 09 65 10 6.37 Paint and Coatings - Product Data 09 91 10 6.38 Paint and Coatings - Finish Samples 09 91 10 6.39 Paint and Coatings - Manufacturer`s Instructions 09 91 10 6.40 Toilet and Accessories- Product Data 10 28 14 6.41 Toilet and Accessories- Manufacturer’s Installation

Instruction 10 28 14

6.42 Vibration Isolation - Shop Drawings with performance and product data

6.45 Testing, Adjusting, Balancing, Commissioning – Balancing Report

6.46 Testing, Adjusting, Balancing, Commissioning – System Data

6.47 Testing, Adjusting, Balancing, Commissioning – Schematic Drawings of each system

6.48 Duct Installation - Samples of each type 6.49 Equipment Insulation – Samples of each type 6.50 Piping Insulation - Samples of each type


6.51 Ductwork - Certification of Ratings 6.52 Fire Dampers - Shop Drawings 6.53 Fire Dampers - Product Data 6.54 Flexible Ductwork - Samples with Product Data 6.55 Fans - Shop Drawings including Fan Curves and Sound

power data

6.56 Variable Refrigerant Volumes Systems - Shop Drawing and Product Data

6.57 Grilles, Registers, Diffusers - Shop Drawings 6.58 Grilles, Registers, Diffusers - Samples 6.59 Louvres, Intakes and Vents - Certified Data 6.60 Air-to-Air Energy Recovery - Product Data 6.61 Air-to-Air Energy Recovery - Shop Drawings 6.62 Air-to-Air Energy Recovery - Certificates 6.63 Air-to-Air Energy Recovery - Test Reports 6.64 Air-to-Air Energy Recovery - Manufacturer’s Installation

Instructions

6.65 Controls - Shop Drawings

6.66 Lighting- Shop Drawings 6.67 Lighting Control- Shop Drawings 6.68 Emergency Lighting System and Exit Signs Transformers

Electrical Panels Ground Bras- Shop Drawings

6.69 Coordination Study 6.70 Arc Flash Analysis 6.71 Emergency Light Level Test Report 6.72 Lighting Control System Commissioning Report MI Cable

Manufacturers Certification Report Meggering Report Fire

6.73 Alarm System Preventative Maintenance Contract 6.74 2 Year Central Monitoring Contract for Fire Alarm System

7.0

Clo

se-O

ut 7.1 Operating and Maintenance Manuals 01 78 10

7.2 As-built Documents and Samples 01 78 10 7.3 Record Documents 01 78 10 7.4 Warranties 01 78 36



END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 01 35 23 Toronto, ON HEALTH AND SAFETY SBA Project No. A18010 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Safety requirements and adherence.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.


1.3 SAFETY PLAN .1 Develop written site-specific Health and Safety Plan based on hazard

assessment prior to commencing any site Work and continue to implement, maintain, and enforce plan until final demobilization from site. Health and Safety Plan must address project specifications.

.2 Consultant may respond in writing, where deficiencies or concerns are noted and may request re-submission with correction of deficiencies or concerns.

1.4 RESPONSIBILITY .1 The Contractor according to applicable local jurisdiction, is responsible for health

and safety of persons on site, safety of property on site and for protection of persons adjacent to site and environment to extent that they may be affected by conduct of Work.

.2 Comply with and enforce compliance by employees with safety requirements of Contract Documents, applicable federal, provincial, territorial and local statutes, regulations, and ordinances, and with site-specific Health and Safety Plan.

.3 Should any unforeseen or peculiar safety-related factor, hazard, or condition become evident during performance of Work, and follow procedures in place for Employee's Right to Refuse Work in accordance with Acts and Regulations of Province having jurisdiction. Advise Consultant verbally and in writing.

1.5 SUBMITTALS .1 Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

.2 Submit site-specific Health and Safety Plan: within seven (7) days after date of Notice to Proceed and prior to commencement of Work.

.3 Health and Safety Plan must include:

.1 Results of site specific safety hazard assessment.

.2 Results of safety and health risk or hazard analysis for site tasks and operation.

.4 Submit copies of Contractor's authorized representative's work site health and safety inspection reports to Consultant monthly.

.5 Submit copies of incident and accident reports.


.6 Submit Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) to Consultant.

.7 Consultant will review Contractor's site-specific Health and Safety Plan and provide comments to Contractor. Revise plan as appropriate and resubmit plan to Consultant within five days (5) days after receipt of comments from Consultant.

.8 Consultant's review of Contractor's final Health and Safety plan should not be construed as approval and does not reduce the Contractor's overall responsibility for construction Health and Safety.

.9 Medical Surveillance: Where prescribed by legislation, regulation or safety program, submit certification of medical surveillance for site personnel prior to commencement of Work, and submit additional certifications for any new site personnel to Consultant.

.10 File Notice of Project with Provincial authorities prior to commencement of Work.

1.6 SAFETY ACTIVITIES .1 Perform site specific safety hazard assessment related to project.

.2 Schedule and administer Health and Safety meeting(s) prior to commencement of Work.

.3 Perform Work in accordance with Section 01 41 00 - Regulatory Requirements and this section.

1.7 HEALTH AND SAFETY COORDINATOR .1 Employ and assign to Work, competent and authorized representative as Health

and Safety Coordinator. Health and Safety Coordinator must:

.1 Have minimum two (2) years' site-related working experience specific to activities associated with construction.

.2 Have working knowledge of occupational safety and health regulations.

.3 Be responsible for completing Contractor's Health and Safety Training Sessions and ensuring that personnel not successfully completing required training are not permitted to enter site to perform Work.

.4 Be responsible for implementing, enforcing daily and monitoring site-specific Contractor's Health and Safety Plan.

.5 Be on site during execution of Work and report directly to site supervisor.

1.8 POSTING OF DOCUMENTS .1 Ensure applicable items, articles, notices and orders are posted in conspicuous

location on site in accordance with Acts and Regulations of Province having jurisdiction, and in consultation with Consultant.

1.9 CORRECTION OF NON-COMPLIANCE .1 Immediately address health and safety non-compliance issues identified by

authority having jurisdiction or by Owner and/or Consultant.

.2 Provide Owner and Consultant with written report of action taken to correct non-compliance of health and safety issues identified.


.3 Owner and/or Consultant may stop Work if non-compliance of health and safety regulations is not corrected.

1.10 HAZARDOUS WORK .1 Blasting or other use of explosives is not permitted.

1.11 WORK STOPPAGE .1 Give precedence to safety and health of public and site personnel and protection

of environment over cost and schedule considerations for Work.

1.12 FIRE PROTECTION .1 Provide and maintain temporary fire protection equipment during performance of

Work required by governing codes, regulations and bylaws.

.2 Burning rubbish and construction waste materials is not permitted on site.

.3 Maintain placed or installed fire resistive construction, firestopping and fireproofing to protect the portions of the Work during construction.



END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 01 41 00 Toronto, ON REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS SBA Project No. A18010 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Laws, notices, permits and fees.

.2 Discovery of hazardous materials.


to 49.

1.3 LAWS, NOTICES, PERMITS AND FEES .1 The laws of the Place of the Work shall govern the Work.

.2 Building permit is required and will be applied for by the Consultant. In addition the Contractor shall be responsible for other permits, licenses or certificates necessary for the performance of the Work which were in force at the date of executing the Agreement.

.3 Give the required notices and comply with the laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or codes which are or become in force during the performance of the Work and which relate to the Work, to the preservation of the public health and to construction safety.

.4 If the Contractor knowingly performs or allows work to be performed that is contrary to any laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or codes, the Contractor shall be responsible for and shall correct the violations thereof; and shall bear the costs, expenses and damages attributable to the failure to comply with the provisions of such laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or codes.

.5 Determine detailed requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

.6 Pay construction damage deposits levied by municipality in connection with the issuance of a building permit.

1.4 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL DISCOVERY .1 Asbestos: If material resembling asbestos is encountered in course of demolition

work, immediately stop work and notify Consultant.

1.5 PERSONNEL SMOKING .1 Comply with regulatory and Owner imposed smoking restrictions during

execution of the Work within or outside the premises.



END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 01 45 00 Toronto, ON QUALITY CONTROL SBA Project No. A18010 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Inspection and testing, administrative and enforcement requirements.

.2 Tests and mix designs.

.3 Mock-ups.

.4 Mill tests.

.5 Written and electronic reports.

.6 Equipment and system adjust and balance.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 01 21 00 - Allowances.


1.3 REFERENCES .1 ISO/IEC 17025-2005 - General Requirements for the Competence of Testing and

Calibration Laboratories.

.2 SCC (Standards Council of Canada).

1.4 INSPECTION BY AUTHORITY .1 Allow Authorities Having Jurisdiction access to Work. If part of Work is in

preparation at locations other than Place of Work, allow access to such Work whenever it is in progress.

.2 The Contractor shall arrange all inspections required by Authority(s) Having Jurisdiction.

.3 Give timely notice requesting inspection whenever portions of the Work are designated for special tests, inspections or approvals, either when described in the Contract Documents or when required by law in the Place of the Work.

.4 If Contractor covers or permits to be covered Work that has been designated for special tests, inspections or approvals before such is made, uncover such Work, have inspections or tests satisfactorily completed and make good such Work.

.5 Where Owner and/or Consultant feel it necessary, for any reason whatsoever, the Owner and/or Consultant may also arrange for the Authority(s) Having Jurisdiction to attend at the Work site.

1.5 REVIEW BY CONSULTANT .1 Consultant may order any part of the Work to be reviewed or inspected if Work is

suspected to be not in accordance with Contract Documents.


.2 If, upon review such work is found not in accordance with Contract Documents,

correct such Work and pay cost of additional review and correction.

.3 If such Work is found in accordance with Contract Documents, Owner will pay cost of review and replacement.

1.6 INDEPENDENT INSPECTION AGENCIES .1 Independent Inspection and Testing Agencies may be engaged by Owner for

purpose of inspecting and testing portions of Work. Cost of such services will be borne by Owner.

.2 Testing Organizations: Listed by SCC within [email protected] listings.

.3 Allocate Costs as applicable.

.4 Provide equipment required for executing inspection and testing by appointed agencies.

.5 Employment of inspection and testing agencies does not relax responsibility to perform Work in accordance with Contract Documents.

.6 If defects are revealed during inspection and/or testing, appointed agency will request additional inspection and testing to ascertain full degree of defect. Correct defect and irregularities as advised by Consultant at no cost to Owner. Pay costs for retesting and re-inspection.

1.7 ACCESS TO WORK .1 Allow inspection and testing agencies access to Work, off site manufacturing and

fabrication plants.

.2 Cooperate to provide reasonable access and facilities for such access.

1.8 PROCEDURES .1 Notify appropriate agency and Consultant in advance of requirement for tests, in

order that attendance arrangements can be made.

.2 Submit samples and materials required for testing, as specifically requested in specifications. Submit with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence so as not to cause delay in Work.

.3 Provide labour and facilities to obtain and handle samples and materials on site. Provide sufficient space to store and cure test samples.

1.9 REJECTED WORK .1 Remove defective Work, whether result of poor workmanship, use of defective

products or damage and whether incorporated in Work or not, which has been rejected by Consultant as failing to conform to Contract Documents. Replace or re-execute in accordance with Contract Documents.

.2 Make good other Contractor's work damaged by such removals or replacements promptly.


.3 If in opinion of Consultant it is not expedient to correct defective Work or Work

not performed in accordance with Contract Documents, Owner may deduct from Contract Price the difference in value between Work performed and that called for by Contract Documents, amount of which shall be determined by Consultant.

1.10 REPORTS .1 Submit one (1) electronic copy of signed inspection and test reports to

Consultant.

.2 Provide one (1) electronic copy of signed inspection and test reports signed to manufacturer or fabricator of material being inspected or tested and/or Subcontractor of work being inspected or tested.

1.11 TESTS AND MIX DESIGNS .1 Furnish test results and mix designs as may be requested.

.2 The cost of tests and mix designs beyond those called for in Contract Documents or beyond those required by law of Place of Work shall be appraised by Consultant and may be authorized as recoverable.

1.12 MOCK-UPS .1 Prepare mock-up for Work specifically requested in specifications. Include for

Work of all Sections required to provide mock-ups.

.2 No Work is to proceed prior to Consultant’s approval.

.3 Construct in location(s) acceptable to Consultant. Where location is not specified, obtain direction from Consultant. Mock-up location/section to be identified through visual means (area to be taped off).

.4 Prepare mock-ups for Consultant's review with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence, so as not to cause any delay in Work.

.5 Failure to prepare mock-ups in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for an extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed.

.6 If requested, Consultant will assist in preparing a schedule fixing dates for preparation.

.7 Where mock-up(s) are not incorporated into the Work, remove mock-up at conclusion of Work or when acceptable to Consultant. Repair any damage and clean-up at place of mock-up.

.8 Entire mock-up to be removed if not followed prescribed procedure.

.9 Approved mock-up may remain as part of Work at Consultant’s discretion. .

.10 Specification section identifies whether mock-up may remain as part of Work or if it is to be removed.

.11 Selected mock-up(s) to be performed in front of Consultant.


.12 Mock-ups to be carried out by assigned pre-qualified subcontractor/craftsman.

Subcontractor/craftsman who performs mock-up must carry out and oversee associated Work.

1.13 MILL TESTS .1 Submit mill test certificates as requested/required of specification Sections.

1.14 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS .1 Submit adjustment and balancing reports for mechanical, electrical and building

equipment systems.



END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 01 51 00 Toronto, ON TEMPORARY UTILITIES SBA Project No. A18010 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Temporary utilities.

.2 Salvaging products for reuse.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 01 52 00 - Construction Facilities.

.2 Section 01 53 00 - Temporary Construction.

1.3 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL .1 Provide temporary utilities controls in order to execute work expeditiously.

.2 Salvage and assist in recycling products for potential reuse.

.3 Remove from site all such work after use.


1.4 WATER SUPPLY .1 Owner will provide continuous supply of potable water for construction use.

.2 Provide temporary connections to existing supply point, and pay all costs for installation, maintenance and removal.

1.5 TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATION .1 Provide temporary heating if required during furnace replacement, including

attendance, maintenance and fuel.

.2 Construction heaters used inside building must be vented to outside or be non-flameless type. Solid fuel salamanders are not permitted.

.3 Provide temporary heat and ventilation in enclosed areas as required to:

.1 Facilitate progress of Work.

.2 Protect Work and products against dampness and cold.

.3 Prevent moisture condensation on surfaces.

.4 Provide ambient temperatures and humidity levels for storage, installation and curing of materials.

.5 Provide adequate ventilation to meet health regulations for safe working environment.

.4 Maintain temperatures of minimum 10 degrees C in areas where construction is in progress.

.5 Ventilating:

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 01 51 00 Toronto, ON TEMPORARY UTILITIES SBA Project No. A18010 Page 2

.1 Prevent accumulations of dust, fumes, mists, vapours or gases in areas occupied during construction.

.2 Provide local exhaust ventilation to prevent harmful accumulation of hazardous substances into atmosphere of occupied areas.

.3 Dispose of exhaust materials in manner that will not result in harmful exposure to persons.

.4 Ventilate storage spaces containing hazardous or volatile materials.

.5 Ventilate temporary sanitary facilities.

.6 Continue operation of ventilation and exhaust system for time after cessation of work process to assure removal of harmful contaminants.

.6 Maintain strict supervision of operation of temporary heating and ventilating equipment to:

.1 Conform with applicable codes and standards.

.2 Enforce safe practices.

.3 Prevent abuse of services.

.4 Prevent damage to finishes.

.5 Vent direct-fired combustion units to outside.

.7 Be responsible for damage to Work due to failure in providing adequate heat and protection during construction.

1.6 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHT .1 The Owner will pay for temporary power during construction for temporary

lighting to maximum available supply. Site verify available supply, including voltages, amperages and phases. Unless otherwise noted, assume 110 volts, 15 amps, single phase available. Do not interrupt occupants use of power when using power for construction purposes.

.2 Contractor to provide source/generator for all site temporary electrical/power requirements during power switch over. Pay all costs for installation, maintenance and removal.

.3 Provide temporary connection to existing supply points and all costs for installation, maintenance and removal.

.4 Provide and maintain temporary lighting throughout project. Ensure level of illumination is not less than 16 lumen per sq ft.

.5 Do not use electricity to provide temporary construction heating except with prior permission of owner.

1.7 Fire Protection .1 Provide and maintain temporary fire protection equipment during performance of

work verified by governing codes, regulations and bylaws and by owner’s requirements.

.2 Open and burning rubbish are not permitted on site.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 01 51 00 Toronto, ON TEMPORARY UTILITIES SBA Project No. A18010 Page 3 Part 2 Products (Not Used)

Part 3 Execution (Not Used) END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 01 52 00 Toronto, ON CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES SBA Project No. A18010 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Construction aids.

.2 Office and sheds.

.3 Parking.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 01 51 00 - Temporary Utilities.


1.3 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL .1 Provide construction facilities in order to execute work expeditiously.


1.4 SCAFFOLDING .1 Provide and maintain ladders, platforms and scaffolding.

1.5 HOISTING .1 Provide, operate and maintain hoists required for moving of workers, materials

and equipment.

.2 Hoists shall be operated by qualified operator.

1.6 USE OF THE WORK .1 Confine work and operations of employees by Contract Documents. Do not

unreasonably encumber premises with Products.

.2 Do not load or permit to load any part of Work with a weight or force that will endanger the Work.

1.7 CONSTRUCTION PARKING .1 Parking is permitted within staging compound. .2 If authorized to use existing roads for access to project site, maintain such roads

for duration of Contract and make good damage resulting from Contractors' use of roads.

.3 Clean runways and taxi areas where used by Contractor's equipment.

1.8 SECURITY .1 Comply with City’s policies and practices regarding security and lock-up at site.

Do not reduce level of security afforded to site and/or buildings by Work of this Contract.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 01 52 00 Toronto, ON CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES SBA Project No. A18010 Page 2

.2 The Contractor is responsible for arranging access for all workers and sub-contractors to site.

.3 Ensure that Staging Compound is adequately fenced and locked-up after working hours and during holidays. Comply with City’s fencing requirement.

.4 Ensure that all doors and/or gates are locked and secured prior to leaving site.

1.9 OFFICES .1 Provide a clearly marked and fully stocked first-aid case in a readily available on

site.

1.10 EQUIPMENT, TOOL AND MATERIALS STORAGE .1 Provide and maintain, in a clean and orderly condition, lockable weatherproof

sheds for storage of tools, equipment and materials in Staging Compound.

.2 Locate materials not required to be stored in weatherproof shed on site in a manner to cause least interference with work activities.

.3 Tool and material storage area limited to Staging Compound.

1.11 SANITARY FACILITIES .1 Contractor to provide own sanitary facilities within Staging Compound. Maintain

in clean condition. Contractor will be charged for any excess cleaning required by City Staff.

1.12 DISCOVERED VALUABLES .1 All articles, such as relics, antiquities, or items of historical or scientific interest

which may be discovered during demolition, dismantling, or excavation of the place of Work are the property of the Owner and shall be immediately delivered into the custody of the Owner.



END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 01 53 00 Toronto, ON TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION SBA Project No. A18010 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Site enclosure.

.2 Guardrails and barriers.

.3 Weather enclosures.

.4 Dust tight barriers.

.5 Protection for off-site and public property.

.6 Protection of applied finishes.

.7 Protection of surrounding Work.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 01 51 00 - Temporary Utilities.


1.3 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL .1 Provide temporary controls in order to execute Work expeditiously.


1.4 SITE ENCLOSURE .1 Supply and install temporary fencing.

.2 Provide barriers around trees and plants designated to remain.

.3 Protect from damage by equipment and construction procedures.

1.5 GUARD RAILS AND BARRIERS .1 Provide secure, rigid guard rails and barricades around deep excavations, open

shafts, open stair wells, open edges of floors and roofs.

1.6 WEATHER ENCLOSURES .1 Provide weather tight closures to unfinished door and window openings, tops of

shafts and other openings in floors and roofs.

.2 Close off floor areas where walls are not finished; seal off other openings; enclose building interior work for temporary heat.

.3 Design enclosures to withstand wind pressure.

1.7 DUST TIGHT BARRIERS .1 Provide dust tight barriers and screens to localize dust generating activities, and

for protection of workers, finished areas of Work and public.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 01 53 00 Toronto, ON TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION SBA Project No. A18010 Page 2

.2 Maintain and relocate protection until such work is complete.

1.8 PROTECTION FOR OFF-SITE AND PUBLIC PROPERTY .1 Protect surrounding private and public property from damage during performance

of Work.

.2 Be responsible for damage incurred.

1.9 PROTECTION OF APPLIED FINISHES .1 Provide protection for finished and partially finished surfaces and equipment

during performance of Work.

.2 Provide necessary screens, covers, and hoardings.

.3 Be responsible for damage incurred due to lack of or improper protection.

1.10 PROTECTION OF SURROUNDING WORK .1 Provide protection for finished and partially finished Work from damage.

.2 Provide necessary cover and protection.

.3 Be responsible for damage incurred due to lack of or improper or inappropriate protection.



END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 01 61 00 Toronto, ON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS SBA Project No. A18010 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Product quality, availability, storage, handling, protection, and transportation.

.2 Product substitution procedures.

.3 Manufacturer's instructions.

.4 Quality of Work, coordination and fastenings.

.5 Existing facilities.


to 49.

1.3 DEFINITIONS .1 New: Produced from new materials.

.2 Defective: A condition determined exclusively by the Owner and/or Consultant.

1.4 PRODUCT QUALITY .1 Products, materials, equipment, parts or assemblies (referred to as Products)

incorporated in Work: New, not damaged or defective, of best quality (compatible with specification requirements) for purpose intended. If requested, provide evidence as to type, source and quality of Products provided.

.2 Defective Products, whenever identified prior to completion of Work, will be rejected, regardless of previous inspections. Inspection does not relieve responsibility, but is precaution against oversight or error. Remove and replace defective Products at own expense and be responsible for delays and expenses caused by rejection.

.3 Should any dispute arise as to quality or fitness of Products, decision rests strictly with Consultant.

.4 Unless otherwise indicated in specifications, maintain uniformity of manufacture for any particular or like item throughout building.

.5 Permanent labels, trademarks and nameplates on Products are not acceptable in prominent locations, except where required for operating instructions, or when located in mechanical or electrical rooms.

1.5 AVAILABILITY .1 Immediately upon signing Contract, review Product delivery requirements and

anticipate foreseeable supply delays for any items.

.2 If delays in supply of Products are foreseeable, notify Consultant of such, in order that substitutions or other remedial action may be authorized in ample time to prevent delay in performance of Work.


.3 In event of failure to notify Consultant at commencement of Work and should it subsequently appear that Work may be delayed for such reason, Consultant reserves right to substitute more readily available Products of similar character, at no increase in Contract Price or Contract Time.

1.6 STORAGE AND PROTECTION .1 Store and protect Products in accordance with manufacturers' written

instructions.

.2 Store with seals and labels intact and legible.

.3 Store sensitive Products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favourable to Product.

.4 For exterior storage of fabricated Products, place on sloped supports above ground.

.5 Cover Products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of Products.

.6 Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter.

.7 Provide equipment and personnel to store Products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

.8 Arrange storage of Products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify Products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.

1.7 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING .1 Transport and handle Products in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions.

.2 Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that Products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and Products are undamaged.

.3 Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

1.8 EXISTING UTILITIES .1 When breaking into or connecting to existing services or utilities, execute Work at

times directed by local governing authorities, with minimum of disturbance to vehicular traffic and public/pedestrians.

.2 Protect, relocate or maintain existing active services. When services are encountered, cap off in manner approved by authority having jurisdiction. Stake and record location of capped service.

1.9 MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS .1 Unless otherwise indicated in specifications, install or erect Products to

manufacturer's written instructions. Do not rely on labels or enclosures provided with Products. Obtain written instructions directly from manufacturers.


.2 Notify Consultant in writing, of conflicts between specifications and manufacturer's instructions, so that Consultant may establish course of action.

.3 Improper installation or erection of Products, due to failure in complying with these requirements, authorizes Consultant to require removal and re-installation at no increase in Contract Price or Contract Time.

1.10 QUALITY OF WORK .1 Ensure Quality of Work is of highest standard, executed by workers experienced

and skilled in respective duties for which they are employed. Immediately notify Consultant if required Work is such as to make it impractical to produce required results.

.2 Do not employ anyone unskilled in their required duties. Consultant reserves right to require dismissal from site any workers deemed incompetent or careless.

.3 Decisions as to standard or fitness of Quality of Work in cases of dispute rest solely with Consultant, whose decision is final.

1.11 COORDINATION .1 Ensure cooperation of workers in laying out Work. Maintain efficient and

continuous supervision.

.2 Be responsible for coordination and placement of openings, sleeves and accessories.

1.12 CONCEALMENT .1 In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floors, walls and ceilings,

except where indicated otherwise.

.2 Before installation, inform Consultant if there is interference. Install as directed by Consultant.

1.13 REMEDIAL WORK .1 Perform remedial work required to repair or replace parts or portions of Work

identified as defective or unacceptable. Coordinate adjacent affected Work as required.

.2 Perform remedial work by specialists familiar with materials affected. Perform in a manner to neither damage nor put at risk any portion of Work.

1.14 LOCATION OF FIXTURES .1 Consider location of fixtures, outlets, and mechanical and electrical items

indicated as approximate.

.2 Inform Consultant of conflicting installation. Install as directed.

1.15 FASTENINGS .1 Provide metal fastenings and accessories in same texture, colour and finish as

adjacent materials, unless indicated otherwise.

.2 Prevent electrolytic action between dissimilar metals and materials.


.3 Use non-corrosive hot dip galvanized steel fasteners and anchors for securing exterior work, unless stainless steel or other material is specifically requested in affected specification Section.

.4 Space anchors within individual load limit or shear capacity and ensure they provide positive permanent anchorage. Wood, or any other organic material plugs are not acceptable.

.5 Keep exposed fastenings to a minimum, space evenly and install neatly.

.6 Fastenings which cause spalling or cracking of material to which anchorage is made are not acceptable.

1.16 FASTENINGS - EQUIPMENT .1 Use fastenings of standard commercial sizes and patterns with material and

finish suitable for service.

.2 Use heavy hexagon heads, semi-finished unless otherwise specified. Use Type 316 stainless steel for exterior areas.

.3 Bolts may not project more than one diameter beyond nuts.

.4 Use plain type washers on equipment, sheet metal and soft gasket lock type washers where vibrations occur. Use resilient washers with stainless steel.

1.17 PROTECTION OF WORK IN PROGRESS .1 Prevent overloading of any part of the Project.

.2 Do not cut, drill or sleeve any load bearing structural member, unless specifically indicated, without written approval of Consultant.

Part 2 Products (Not Used) Part 3 Execution (Not Used)

END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 01 73 30 Toronto, ON. CUTTING AND PATCHING SBA Project No. 18010 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 01 32 00 - Construction Progress Documentation

.2 Section 01 61 00 - Product Requirements.

.3 Individual Product Specification Sections:

.1 Cutting and patching incidental to work of the section.

.2 Advance notification to other sections of openings required in Work of those sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects:

.1 Structural integrity of any element of Project.

.2 Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.

.3 Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.

.4 Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.

.2 Include in request:

.1 Identification of Project.

.2 Location and description of affected Work.

.3 Necessity for cutting or alteration.

.4 Description of proposed Work and Products to be used.

.5 Alternatives to cutting and patching.

.6 Effect on work of Owner or separate contractor.

.7 Written permission of affected separate contractor.

.8 Date and time work will be executed.

1.4 EXISTING CONDITIONS .1 Examine areas to be selectively demolished or dismantled, and confirm that their

condition is substantially the same as the date on which bids closed, and as indicated in the Contract Documents. Advise the Consultant of any conditions that vary from this.

.2 Be familiar with structural system of the building, and the elements being demolished or dismantled.

.3 Inspect site and verify with Consultant items designated for removal and items to remain. Protect existing items designated to remain and materials designated for salvage. In event of damage to such items, immediately replace or make repairs to approval of Consultant and at no cost to Owner.


.4 Demolition of spray or trowel-applied asbestos can be hazardous to health. Should material resembling spray or trowel-applied asbestos be encountered in the course of demolition work, stop work and notify the Consultant immediately. Do not proceed until written instructions have been received from the Constant.

1.5 EXTENT OF DEMOLITION .1 Drawings showing extent of selective demolition are intended to be schematic

and do not indicate full extent of all selective demolition work. Examine all Documents to determine complete scope of selective demolition, removals and re-instatement, repair and make good required to complete the Work.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS .1 Primary Products: Those required to match original installation.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Examine existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements

subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching.

.2 After uncovering existing Work, assess conditions affecting performance of work.

.3 Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION .1 Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work. Provide

devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage.

.2 Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work.

.3 Maintain excavations free of water.

3.3 WORK .1 Dispose of demolished materials except where noted otherwise and in

accordance with authorities having jurisdiction.

.2 Remove the following materials and equipment for salvage, and store, protect, and reinstall to suit execution of other parts of the Work:

.1 Mechanical and electrical items which impede the installation of new elements.

.2 All other elements required to allow the Work to be completed, whether specifically indicated, or not.

.3 Do not disrupt active or energized utilities designated to remain undisturbed, without Consultant’s consent.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 01 73 30 Toronto, ON. CUTTING AND PATCHING SBA Project No. 18010 Page 3 3.4 SAFETY CODE

.1 Comply with applicable legislation.

3.5 DISMANTLING AND DEMOLITION .1 Do all work in a manner to prevent endangering safety of building or occupants.

.2 Selectively dismantle parts of the building as required to suit installation of new work and remedial work. Salvage and reinstall elements unless otherwise indicated. Make good disturbed surfaces.

.3 Remove existing equipment, services, and obstacles where required for refinishing or making good of existing surfaces, and replace as work progresses.

.4 Do not disturb adjacent items designated to remain in place.

.5 At end of each day’s work, leave work in a safe condition so that no part is in danger of topping or falling. Protect interiors of parts not be demolished from exterior elements at all times.

.6 Demolish to minimize dusting. Keep materials wetted as directed by Consultant.

.7 Do not throw or allow debris to fall uncontrolled from heights. Use chutes and other controls.

3.6 RESTORATION .1 Upon completion of work, remove debris, trim surfaces and leave work site clean.

.2 Reinstate areas and existing works outside areas of demolition to conditions that existed prior to commencement of work.

3.7 CUTTING .1 Execute cutting and fitting including excavation and fill to complete the Work.

.2 Uncover work to install improperly sequenced work.

.3 Remove and replace defective or non-conforming work.

.4 Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.

.5 Provide openings in the Work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work.

.6 Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.

.7 Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval.

3.8 PATCHING .1 Execute patching to complement adjacent Work.

.2 Fit Products together to integrate with other Work.

.3 Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing.


.4 Employ original installer to perform patching for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces.

.5 Restore work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

.6 Fit work to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.

.7 At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material to full thickness of the penetrated element.

.8 Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 01 74 00 Toronto, ON CLEANING AND WASTE PROCESSING SBA Project No. A18010 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Progressive cleaning.

.2 Cleaning prior to acceptance.


to 49.

Part 2 Products

2.1 CLEANING MATERIALS .1 Cleaning Agents and Materials: Low VOC content.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 PROGRESSIVE CLEANING .1 Maintain Work in tidy condition, free from accumulation of waste products and

debris, including that caused by Owner or other Contractors.

.2 Clear snow and ice from area of construction, bank or pile snow in designated areas only.

.3 Containers:

.1 Provide on-site containers for collection of waste materials and debris.

.2 Provide and use clearly marked, separate bins for recycling.

.4 Store volatile waste in covered metal containers, and remove from premises at end of each working day.

.5 Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned, and as recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.

3.2 CLEANING PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE .1 Prior to applying for Substantial Performance of the Work, remove surplus

products, tools, construction machinery and equipment not required for performance of remaining Work.

.2 Remove waste products and debris. Leave area of Work clean and suitable for occupancy and use.

.3 Prior to final review, remove surplus products, tools, construction machinery and equipment.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 01 74 00 Toronto, ON CLEANING AND WASTE PROCESSING SBA Project No. A18010 Page 2

.4 Clean and polish glass, mirrors, hardware, wall tile, stainless steel, chrome, porcelain enamel, baked enamel, plastic laminate, and mechanical and electrical fixtures. Replace broken, scratched or disfigured glass.

.5 Remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from decorative work, electrical and mechanical fixtures, walls, floors, ceilings and all building surfaces.

.6 Clean lighting reflectors, lenses, and other lighting surfaces.

.7 Vacuum clean and dust building interiors, behind grilles, louvres and screens.

.8 Clean and polish surface finishes, as recommended by manufacturer.

.9 Inspect finishes, fitments and equipment and ensure specified workmanship and operation.

.10 Broom clean and wash exterior walks, steps and surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds.

.11 Remove dirt and other disfiguration from exterior surfaces.

.12 Clean and sweep roofs, gutters, areaways, and sunken wells.

.13 Sweep and wash clean paved areas.

3.3 FINAL PRODUCT CLEANING .1 Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment.

.2 Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, and vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

.3 Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned.

.4 Clean filters of operating equipment.

.5 Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.

.6 Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities. Leave area of Work clean and suitable for occupancy and use.

END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 01 78 10 Toronto, ON CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS SBA Project No. A18010 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Inspections and declarations.

.2 Closeout submittals.

.3 Operation and maintenance manual format.

.4 Contents each volume.

.5 Recording actual site conditions.

.6 Record (as-built) documents and samples.

.7 Record documents.

.8 Final survey.

.9 Warranties and bonds.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 01 353 00 – Submittal Procedures


1.3 INSPECTIONS AND DECLARATIONS .1 Contractor's Inspection: Contractor and all Subcontractors shall conduct an

inspection of Work, identify deficiencies and defects, and repair as required to conform to Contract Documents.

.1 Notify Consultant in writing of satisfactory completion of Contractor's Inspection and that corrections have been made.

.2 Request Consultant's Inspection.

.2 Consultant's Inspection: Consultant and Contractor will perform inspection of Work to identify defects or deficiencies. Correct defective and deficient Work accordingly.

.3 Completion: Submit written certificate that following have been performed:

.1 Work has been completed and inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.

.2 Defects have been corrected and deficiencies have been completed.

.3 Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted, balanced and are fully operational.

.4 Certificates required by authorities having jurisdiction have been submitted.

.5 Operation of systems have been demonstrated to Owner's personnel.

.6 Work is complete and ready for Final Inspection.


.4 Final Inspection: When items noted above are completed, request final inspection of Work by Consultant. If Work is deemed incomplete by Consultant, complete outstanding items and request reinspection.

.5 Declaration of Substantial Performance: When Consultant considers deficiencies and defects have been corrected and it appears requirements of Contract have been substantially performed, make application for Substantial Performance of the Work.

.6 Commencement of Warranty Periods: The date of Substantial Performance of the Work shall be the date for commencement of the warranty period.

.7 Commencement of Lien Periods: The date of publication of the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work shall be the date for commencement of the lien period, unless required otherwise by the lien legislation applicable at the Place of the Work.

.8 Final Payment: When Consultant considers final deficiencies and defects have been corrected and it appears requirements of Contract have been completed, make application for final payment.

.9 Payment of Hold-back: After issuance of certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, submit an application for payment of hold-back amount.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS .1 Prepare instructions and data using personnel experienced in maintenance and

operation of described products.

.2 Copy will be returned after final inspection with Consultant's comments.

.3 Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal.

.4 Two (2) weeks prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, submit to the Consultant, three (3) final copies of operating and maintenance.

.5 Ensure spare parts, maintenance materials and special tools provided are new, undamaged or defective, and of same quality and manufacture as products provided in Work.

.6 If requested, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of products provided.

.7 Defective products will be rejected, regardless of previous inspections. Replace products at own expense.

.8 Pay costs of transportation.

1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FORMAT .1 Organize data in the form of an instructional manual.

.2 Binders: vinyl, hard covered, 3 'D' ring, loose leaf 8.5 x 11 inch with spine and face pockets.

.3 When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. Identify contents of each binder on spine.


.4 Cover: Identify each binder with type or printed title 'Project Record Documents'; list title of project and identify subject matter of contents.

.5 Arrange content under Section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents.

.6 Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment.

.7 Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data.

.8 Drawings: provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages.

.9 Provide CAD files in .dwg AutoCAD Release 2015 format on CD.

1.6 CONTENTS - EACH VOLUME .1 Table of Contents: Provide:

.1 Title of project.

.2 Date of submission.

.3 Names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Contractor with name of responsible parties.

.4 Schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of volume.

.2 For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.

.3 Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation; delete inapplicable information. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.

.4 Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams.

.5 Certificate of Acceptance: Relevant certificates issued by authorities having jurisdiction.

1.7 RECORDING ACTUAL SITE CONDITIONS .1 Record information on set of black line opaque drawings, and within the Project

Manual, provided by Consultant.

.2 Annotate with coloured felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colours for each major system, for recording changed information.

.3 Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal Work of the Project until required information is accurately recorded.

.4 Contract drawings and shop drawings: legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including:

.1 Measured depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum.


.2 Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.

.3 Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction.

.4 Field changes of dimension and detail.

.5 Changes made by change orders.

.6 Details not on original Contract Drawings.

.7 References to related shop drawings and modifications.

.5 Specifications: legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including:

.1 Manufacturer, trade name, and catalogue number of each product actually installed, particularly optional items and substitute items.

.2 Changes made by Addenda and change orders.

.6 Other Documents: Maintain manufacturer's certifications, field test records and inspection certifications required by individual specifications sections.

1.8 RECORD (AS-BUILT) DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES .1 In addition to requirements in General Conditions, maintain at the site for

Consultant and/or Owner to view, one (1) record copy of:

.1 Contract Drawings.

.2 Specifications.

.3 Addenda.

.4 Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.

.5 Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.

.6 Field test records.

.7 Inspection certificates.

.8 Manufacturer's certificates.

.2 Store as-built documents and samples in field office apart from documents used for construction. Provide files, racks, and secure storage.

.3 Label as-built documents and file in accordance with section number listings in List of Contents of the Project Manual. Label each document AS-BUILT DOCUMENTS in neat, large, printed letters.

.4 Maintain as-built documents in clean, dry and legible condition. Do not use as-built documents for construction purposes.

.5 Keep as-built documents and samples available for inspection by Consultant.

1.9 RECORD DOCUMENTS .1 Prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, provide on CD the marked up

information from the as-built documents to a master set of drawing and specification files provided by the Consultant, as follows:

.1 Drawings: AutoCAD Release 2015.

.2 Specifications: Microsoft Word.


.2 Mark revised documents as RECORD DOCUMENTS. Include all revisions.

.3 Employ a competent computer draftsperson to indicate changes on the electronic set of record drawings. Provide updated record drawings in AutoCAD Release 2015.

.4 Employ a competent specification writer to indicate changes to the electronic set of record specifications. Provide updated record specifications in Microsoft Word.

.5 Submit completed record documents to Consultant on a CD, accompanied by three (3) hard copy sets.

1.10 FINAL SURVEY .1 If required submit final site survey certificate, certifying that elevations and

locations of completed Work are in conformance, or non-conformance with Contract Documents.

.2 Inaccurate or neglectful information shall become a liability of the Contractor.

1.11 WARRANTIES AND BONDS .1 Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to Table of

Contents listing.

.2 List subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.

.3 Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.

.4 Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial Performance is determined.

.5 Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.

.6 Co-execute submittals when required.

.7 Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittals.



END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 01 78 36 Toronto, ON WARRANTIES SBA Project No. A18010 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 At no cost to the Owner, all labour and materials to correct the defects and

deficiencies. This shall include removal and reinstating components where required to gain access to defect and/or deficiency.

.2 All performance and aesthetic related issues as determined by the Consultant, such as leakage, debonding, corrosion, fading, discolouration, etc.

.3 Excludes reasonable wear and tear.

1.2 The warranty period is two years unless otherwise noted.



END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 06 20 00 Toronto, ON FINISH CARPENTRY SBA Project No. A18010 Page 1

PART 1 General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

.1 Finish carpentry items, other than shop prefabricated casework.

.2 Hardware and attachment accessories.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 08 54 10 – Fibreglass Windows: Wood window stools.

.2 Section 09 91 00 - Paint and Coatings: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 AWMAC (Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada) - Quality Standards.

.2 AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C2 - Lumber, Timbers, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties - Pressure Treatment.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Section 01 33 00: Submission Procedures.

.2 Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details and accessories.

.3 Product Data: Provide data on fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions.

.4 Samples: Submit two samples of kitchen cabinet, 100mm x 100mm in size illustrating wood grain and specified finish.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Perform work in accordance with AWMAC.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

.1 Fabricator: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum 5 years experience in finish carpentry Work of comparable complexity and scope. Submit proof of qualifications.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Conform to applicable code for fire retardant requirements.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 06 20 00 Toronto, ON FINISH CARPENTRY SBA Project No. A18010 Page 2 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

.1 Deliver, store, and handle finish carpentry in accordance with the AWMAC Quality Standards. Control the temperature and humidity in accordance with the AWMAC recommendations, before, during, and after finish carpentry delivery, and also during storage and installation.

.2 Protect work from moisture damage.

1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

.1 Verify that field measurements are as [indicated [on shop drawings]] [instructed by the manufacturer].

1.10 COORDINATION

.1 Coordinate the work with plumbing and electrical rough-in, installation of associated and adjacent components.

PART 2 Products

2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS

.1 Concealed Softwood Lumber: Eastern Spruce, Balsam Fir, or Jack Pine, to CAN/CSA O141, NLGA, and AWMAC Custom Grade, S4S, average moisture content 7% +/-2% at installation.

2.2 MATERIALS

.1 Sold Surface: .1 Vanity Surface: 13mm Corian. Colour TBD. .2 Kitchen Counter Surface: 14 gauge stainless steel work surface

in type 316 stainless steel .3 Kitchen and Vanity Cabinet Panel: 19mm solid core Birch. Grain

pattern to match existing kitchen cabinets.

2.3 ADHESIVE

.1 Adhesive: Type recommended by AWMAC to suit application.

2.4 FASTENERS

.1 Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application. .

.2 Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

.1 Lumber for Shimming and Blocking: Softwood lumber of Pine, Spruce or Fir species.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 06 20 00 Toronto, ON FINISH CARPENTRY SBA Project No. A18010 Page 3

.2 Nails and staples: size and type to suit application, galvanized to CAN/CSA-G164 for exterior work, interior humid areas and for treated lumber; plain finish elsewhere.

.3 Primer: Alkyd primer sealer.

.4 Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish colour.

2.6 HARDWARE

.1 Hinges: Heavy duty, concealed 110 degree, clip, self closing, Model 75M3550 by Blum.

.2 Pulls: 10 mm dia. x 106 mm wide, stainless steel with matt finish, 115.61.601 by Hafele.

.3 Shelf Brackets: built-in pilaster shelving by Knape & Vogt.

.4 Drawer Slides: Full extension, 8400 Series by Knape & Vogt.

.5 Pilasters: clear anodized aluminium recessed shelf standards with 12mm divisions, Model 233 by Knape & Vogt.

2.7 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate to AWMAC Quality standards.

.2 Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.

.3 Shop prepare and identify components for book match grain matching during site erection.

.4 When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.

2.8 SHOP FINISHING

.1 Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.

.2 Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations.

.3 On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes.

.4 Seal, stain and varnish exposed to view surfaces. Brush apply only.

.5 Seal, stain and varnish semi-exposed to view surfaces. Brush apply only.

.6 Prime surfaces in contact with cementitious materials.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 06 20 00 Toronto, ON FINISH CARPENTRY SBA Project No. A18010 Page 4 PART 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.

.2 Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install work in accordance with AWMAC Quality Standard.

.2 Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.

.3 Co-ordinate cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes and other fixtures, in finish carpentry. Round internal corners of cut-outs and seal exposed cores.

.4 Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1 mm. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.

.5 Install prefinished millwork at locations shown on drawings. Position accurately, level, plumb straight.

3.3 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING

.1 Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious materials and masonry.

.2 Remove existing varnish from existing wood sill. Prepare to receive new clear coat.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES

.1 Maximum Variation from True Position: 1.5 mm

.2 Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 0.7 mm

3.5 SCHEDULE .1 Refer to drawing.

END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 07 61 13 Toronto, ON CANOPY ROOFING AND ACCESSORIES SBA Project No. 18010 Page 1

PART 1 General


.1 Supply and install of complete pre-formed metal roofing system including underlayment, roof panel clip system, roof panel, and accessories including associated flashings, closures, sealants, integral gutter, downspout and rain water leaders.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 CSA-S136 for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members

.2 Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute Standards 10M and 20M.

.3 National Building Code of Canada

.4 ASTM A606 - Steel, Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance.

.5 ASTM A653/A653M - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

.6 ASTM A755/A755M - Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process For Exterior Exposed Building Products.

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

.1 Design roof system to resist:

.1 Snow loads and snow build-up and rain load, expected in this geographical region NBCC climatic data, 50 year probability

.2 Wind loads, positive and negative, expected in this geographical region NBCC climatic data, 50 year probability

.3 Dead load of roof system.

.4 If the roof system is to be designed as a shear diaphragm, then the factored shear design loads “Q” and the flexibility factors “F” must be shown on the structural drawings.

.2 Deflection of the roof system is not to exceed 1/240th of the span for the specified live loading.

.3 Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.

.1 Temperature Change (Range): 20 deg C, ambient; 40 deg C, material surfaces

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 07 61 13 Toronto, ON CANOPY ROOFING AND ACCESSORIES SBA Project No. 18010 Page 2 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW


.2 Product Data: Provide maintenance data for cleaning and maintenance of panel finishes for incorporation into Closeout Manual.

.3 Shop Drawings:

.1 Indicate arrangement of cladding system, including dimensions, location of joints, jointing patterns, jointing details, profiles of inner and outer corners, types and locations of supports, fasteners, flashing, closures and all metal components related to the canopy roofing installation.

.2 Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer, attesting to the ability of the metal panels assembly to withstand the specified loads.

.4 Submit letter demonstrates each individual installer’s qualification.

.5 Samples: Submit two samples of metal roofing and fascia, 75 x 75 mm in size illustrating finish colour, sheen, and texture.


.1 Installer shall demonstrate at least five years’ experience in projects similar in scope. Installer shall be Manufacturer’s certified installer.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

.1 Store components and materials in accordance with panel manufacturer’s recommendations and protect from elements.

.2 Protect prefinished steel during fabrication, transportation, site storage and erection, in accordance with CSSBI Standards.

1.7 WARRANTY

.1 Section 01 78 36 – Warranties

.2 For work in this section, warranty by installer against defects or deficiencies in materials or workmanship shall be for a period of one year from date of substantial completion.

.3 Provide a manufacturer’s written warranty: Furnish panel manufacturer’s written warranty covering failure of factory-applied exterior finish within the warranty period. Warranty period for finish: 40 years after the date of Substantial Completion. The values below are based on normal environments and exclude any aggressive atmospheric conditions.

.1 WeatherXL™ (Siliconized Polyester - SMP) will not crack, chip, or peel (lose adhesion) for forty (40) years from date of installation (40.5 yrs from application). This does not include minute fracturing that may occur during the normal fabrication process. WeatherXL™ (Siliconized Polyester - SMP) will not chalk in excess of a number six (6) rating, in accordance with ASTM D-4214-98 method D659 at any time for thirty (30)


years from date of installation (30.5 yrs from application); will not change colour more than eight (8.0) Hunter ∆E units as determined by ASTM method D-2244-02.

PART 2 Products

2.1 MANUFACTURER

.1 VicWest Building Products 5050 South Service Rd., Unit 200, Burlington, ON L7L 5Y7 Tel: 1-(800) 387-7135

2.2 MATERIALS

.1 Structural steel. Refer to drawing.

.2 Complete canopy roof system manufactured by VicWest.

.1 Steel deck: 38mm high.

.2 Substrate: 19mm pressure treated plywood.

.3 Underlayment: Membrane shall be Lastobond Shield HT by Soprema.

.4 Clip System:

.1 Thermally responsive clips to be fabricated from a minimum of 0.91 mm (0.036") steel, with minimum Z275 galvanized coating designed to accommodate expansion and contraction of the roof sheet.

.2 Roof Fasteners: As specified by manufacturer , to resist wind uplift and sliding snow forces.

.5 Prefinished Roof Sheet, exposed to exterior.

.1 Profile: Tradition 100-4, with I-style ribs at 400 mm spacing.

.2 Panel: Z275 galvanized (zinc coated) sheet steel conforming to ASTM A653M structural quality Grade 230 having a nominal core thickness 0.76mm (0.030”).

.6 Snap Cap:

.1 Provide 25mm high snap caps for full length of the roof panel and retained by panel clips, fabricated from Z275 galvanized (zinc coated) sheet steel conforming to ASTM A653M structural quality Grade 230 having a minimum nominal core thickness 0.61mm (0.024”). Finish and colour to match roof sheet.

.7 Sheet Metal Flashing, Trims, Gutters, Downspout and Rainwater Leaders:

.1 Pre-coated galvanized sheet steel, ASTM A653/A653M, G90 zinc coating; primed and finish coated with nominal coating thickness of 0.025 mm; colour selected by Consultant.

.2 Formed from same materials as the roof sheet. Custom fabricated to suit architectural details, as required.

.8 Counterflashing:

.1 Refer to drawing. Detail based on Firestone’s recommendation.


.9 Closures: Foam and metal closures to suit profiles selected, to manufacturer's recommendations.

.10 Sealants: In accordance with manufacturer's recommendation.

2.3 PANEL FINISHES

.1 Cladding coating: Prepainted with WeatherXL™ on interior and exterior face.

.2 Colour: to be selected from the manufacturer’s standard colour range.

2.4 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate roof components to comply with dimensions, profiles, gauges and details as shown on the shop drawings, including fascia and soffit panels and all companion flashing.

.2 Fabricate all components of the system in the factory, ready for field installation.

.3 Provide roof sheet and all accessories in longest practicable length to minimize field lapping of joints.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Examine work of other Sections upon which work of this Section depends.

.2 Report all discrepancies to consultant before beginning work on the roof system.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Roof Materials:

.1 Underlayment: Install underlayment fully adhered to substrate according to manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure all joints are properly lapped and sealed. Tie in with barriers on adjacent surfaces to ensure airtight construction. Provide a continuous seal around all openings in the insulated metal roof system.

.2 Clip System: Attach Tradition clips using fasteners as recommended by the manufacturer, to suit the substrate.

.2 Roof Panel Installation

.1 Install exterior prefinished roof panels on panel support clips, using manufacturer's proper construction procedure. Ensure metal roofing sheet side-lap is positively retained by clips, and proper sheet coverage is maintained.

.2 Install the snap-cap at all side laps as shown on the approved shop drawings. Add sealant as required. Mitre snap-cap as required to resist water entry.

.3 Where indicated on approved shop drawings, secure the end-lap of metal roofing sheets in accordance with the manufacturers specifications and


details to provide a weather-tight seal. Exposed fasteners to match colour of the roof sheet.

.4 Provide notched and formed closures, sealed against weather penetration, at changes in pitch, and at ridges and eaves, where required.

.5 Install all companion flashing and gutters as shown on the shop drawings. Use concealed fasteners when possible. Exposed fasteners to match colour of roof sheet.

.3 Flashing Installation .1 Provide metal flashings as per contract drawings.

.2 Insert flashing into to form tight fit. Secure in place with lead wedges and concealed fasteners. Seal flashings into reglets with sealant, make water tight.

.3 Protect all membrane flashings with metal counter flashings.

.4 Clean surfaces to be covered with metal flashings of dirt and other foreign matter. Drive projecting nails flush with substrate. Do not apply metal flashings over substrates likely to cause rupture.

.5 Provide underlay of resin sized paper under metal flashings installed over concrete, steel or wood. Lay underlay dry as sheet metal work is installed. Secure in place and lap joints 100 mm.

.6 Secure flashings to supporting building elements with concealed continuous cleats and locking strips; avoid exposed surface fasteners.

.7 Fill and seal seams with sealant; rivet corners.

.8 Where flashing is punctured by bolts, provide sheet lead or neoprene washers, 6 mm larger than bolt hole.

.9 Where vertical portion of metal flashing exceeds 300 mm provides vertical standing seams at 600 mm o.c.

.10 Wherever possible, install sleeve flashing systems at penetrations through roof membrane. Install systems in accordance with manufacturer's directions and as follows:

.1 Prior to installation of roofing membrane place bead of sealant around pipes, vent stacks and other components penetrating roof. Place bitumen protection cups over pipes into sealant.

.2 Insulate between penetrating elements and sleeve with 25 mm thick fibrous insulation.

.3 Prime contact surfaces with mastic cement; place flashing jackets onto roof membrane so that base flange is in contact with mastic cement placed on membrane.

.4 Sweat solder or weld on rain collar.

.11 Imperfections in metal flashing work such as holes, dents, creases, or oil-canning will not be accepted.

.12 Seal metal joints watertight.

3.3 CLEANING

.1 Clean exposed panel surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.


.2 Repair and touch up with colour matching high grade enamel minor surface damage, only where permitted by the Architect and only where appearance after touch-up is acceptable to Architect.

.3 Replace damaged panels and components that, in opinion of the Consultant cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 07 92 00 Toronto, ON. JOINT SEALANTS SBA Project No. 18010 Page 1

PART 1 General


.1 Joint sealant work required to seal building tightly from exterior and interior, to withstand action of elements and to complete building envelope, air and vapour barriers, and all other joint sealant work, unless specified to be included under other Sections.


.1 Section 08 11 13 – Metal Doors and Frames.

.2 Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry

.3 Section 10 28 14 - Toilet and Bath Accessories

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM C834 – Specification for Latex Sealants.

.2 ASTM C920 – Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

.3 ASTM C1193 – Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.

.4 ASTM C1311 – Specification for Solvent Release Sealants.

.5 ASTM C1330 – Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid Applied Sealants.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

.1 Type "A" conditions: All joints on the building interior that are not subject to movement and that require filling for appearance or sanitary reasons. The principal locations are as follows: .1 Joints between metal frames of all kinds and adjacent construction, in

interior partitions. .2 Other locations indicated on the Drawings

.2 Type "B" conditions: Exposed areas on the building interior which require a mildew resistant sealant. The principal locations are as follows: .1 Joints around washroom accessories, water closets, urinals, lavatories,

vanities and shelves. .2 Joints around counters at walls. .3 Other locations indicated on the Drawings.

1.5 COORDINATION

.1 Section 01 31 00 – Project Managing and Coordination

.2 Coordination:


.1 Coordinate with other Work having a direct bearing on Work of this section.

.2 Coordinate the Work with all sections referencing this section.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

.1 Product Data: Submit product information from sealant manufacturer prior to commencement of work verifying the following: .1 Selected sealant materials are those specified. .2 Chemical characteristics, limitations; colour availability. .3 Suitability of sealants for purposes intended and join design. .4 Substrate preparation and application procedures. Indicate special

procedures, surface preparation, perimeter conditions that require special attention.

.5 Documentation that product meets or exceeds specified requirements.

.6 Test report on adhesion, compatibility and staining effect on samples of materials used on Project;

.7 Sealants compatibility with other materials and products with which they come in contact including but not limited to sealants provided under other Sections, insulation adhesives, bitumen, concrete, metals and metal finishes, ceramic tile, plastic laminates, paints;

.8 Suitability of sealants for temperature and humidity conditions at time of application.

.9 Shop Drawings: Indicate sealant joints and dimensions, location, materials, structural bite, glueline thickness, joint profile, and support framing.

.10 Samples: Submit two (2) samples, 6 inch in size illustrating sealant colour for selection.


.1 Perform Work to sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions.

.2 Perform sealant application Work to ASTM C1481.

.3 Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three (3) years documented experience.

.4 Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the Work of this section with minimum five (5) years documented experience and approved by the manufacturer.

1.8 MOCK-UP

.1 At Site, in areas designated by Consultant provide samples of each type of sealant application minimum 36" long each, showing location, size, shape and depth of joint complete with backup materials, primer, caulking and sealant, bond, colour and quality of installation work. Construct additional samples if required to obtain approval. Do no sealing work until samples have been


approved. Approved samples shall become standard of comparison for sealing and caulking work on Site and shall become part of Work.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Section 01 61 00 – Product and Material Requirements.

.2 Accept materials on site in manufacturer’s unopened original packaging.

.3 Store primers and sealants in dry location with ambient temperature as per manufacturer’s written recommendation.

1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation

1.11 SCHEDULING

.1 Schedule work so waterproofing, water repellents and preservative finishes are installed after sealants, unless sealant manufacturer approves otherwise in writing.

.2 Ensure sealants are cured before covering with other materials.

1.12 WARRANTY

.1 Section 01 78 10 – Closeout Submittals

.2 Provide a five (5) year warranty against defects and deficiencies. Promptly correct to satisfaction of Consultant and at no expense to the owner, any defects or deficiencies which become apparent within the warranty period. Defects include, but are not limited to: cracking, crumbling, melting, shrinkage, sags, failure in adhesion, cohesion or reversion, air and moisture leakage, marbling or streaking due to improper mixing, discolouration due to dirt pick-up during curing, and staining of adjacent materials.

.3 Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve water tight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.

PART 2 Products

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

.1 Tremco, Inc., Commercial Sealants and Waterproofing Division An RPM Company, Beachwood OH; (866) 321-6357; email: [email protected]; www.tremcosealants.com.

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.tremcosealants.com/

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 07 92 00 Toronto, ON. JOINT SEALANTS SBA Project No. 18010 Page 4 2.2 SEALANTS

.1 Sealant “Type A” Conditions: Non sag, one part in acrylic polymer caulk, chemical curing, non-staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging type: Colour to be selected from manufacturer’s standard colour range. .1 Service Temperature Range: 5 to 60 degrees C. .2 Shore A Hardness Range 50 to ± 5. .3 Product: Mono 555 manufactured by Tremco

.2 Sealant “Type B” Conditions: Mildew resistant silicone sealant to ASTM C920, type S, Grade NS, class 25, and meeting requirements of FDA regulation 21 CFR 177.2600, Non-Staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging, type: colour to be selected from manufacturer’s standard colour range: .1 Service Temperature Range: -37 to 60 degrees C. .2 Shore A Hardness Range: 25. .3 Product: 786 Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant Manufactured by Dow

Corning.

2.3 ACCESSORIES .1 Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit

application.

.2 Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.

.3 Joint Backing: ASTM C1330, round, closed cell; polyethylene foam rod, oversized 30% to 50% larger than joint width.

.4 Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

.5 Masking tape: Non-staining, non-absorbent type compatible with sealant and adjacent surfaces.

.6 Setting Blocks and Spacers: Compatible with silicone sealant and recommended by sealant manufacturer.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify that joint openings and substrate surfaces are clean, dry, and free of frost

and ready to receive Work.

.2 Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

3.2 PREPARATION .1 Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of

sealant.


.2 Clean and prime joints to sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

.3 Perform preparation to ASTM C1193 for solvent release and latex base sealants.

.4 Perform preparation to manufacturer's written instructions.

.5 Protect elements surrounding the Work of this section from damage or disfiguration.

3.3 INSTALLATION .1 Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.

.2 Install sealant to sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

.3 Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve 2:1 width/depth ratios. Minimum joint size shall be 6mm x 6mm, maximum depth 13mm.

.4 Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of the joint width.

.5 Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.

.6 Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.

.7 Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

.8 Tool joints concave unless otherwise detailed.

.9 Where installation is visible at mortar joints, flashing reglets, etc, dress sealant with sharp sand while still tacky.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control.

.2 Joint Sealants: Perform adhesion tests to manufacturer's written instructions and ASTM C1193, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab.

.1 Perform test seven (7) days after installation at a rate of one test every 1000 ft of installed sealant.

.3 Remove sealants failing adhesion test, clean substrates, reinstall sealants and perform retesting.

.4 Maintain test log and submit report to Consultant indicating tests, locations, dates, results, and remedial actions.

3.5 CLEANING .1 Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning and Waste Processing.


.2 Immediately clean adjacent surfaces which have been soiled and leave Work in neat, clean condition. Remove excess materials, compound smears or other soling resulting from application of sealants. Use recommended cleaners and solvents.

3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK .1 Remove masking tape and excess sealant.

.2 Protect sealants until cured.

END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 08 11 13 Toronto, ON. METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SBA Project No. A18010 Page 1

PART 1 General


.1 Hollow metal doors and frames: Non-rated and fire rated steel doors.

.2 Roll up steel doors and tracks.

.3 Garage doors: Replace two sections of each garage door with full size glazing.


.1 Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.

.2 Section 09 91 00 - Paint and Coatings.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.


.3 ASTM C1363 - Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Hot-Box Apparatus.

.4 ASTM E2074 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, Including Positive Pressure Testing of Side-Hinged and Pivoted Swinging Door Assemblies.

.5 ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating of Sound Insulation.

.6 CSDFMA (Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturers Association).

.7 DHI (Door Hardware Institute) - The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware.

.8 NFPA 80 - Fire Doors, Fire Windows.

.9 NFPA 252 - Fire Tests for Door Assemblies.

.10 SDI-100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames.

.11 UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.


.1 Section 01 33 00: Submission Procedures.

.2 Product Data: Indicate door configurations, location of cut-outs for hardware reinforcement.

.3 Shop Drawings:


.1 Refer to approved Hardware Schedule to prepare metal doors and frames shop drawing.

.2 Indicate door elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, glazing, and finishes.

.3 Indicate all door preparation required.

.4 Submit all three shop drawing packages (approved Hardware Schedule, Metal Door and Frame and Aluminum Entrance Storefronts) at the same time for review.

.5 Mock-up: .1 Provide field mock-up for garage door 101 M3.

1.5 WARRANTY

.1 Section 01 78 36: Warranties.


.1 Conform to requirements of CSDFMA.

.2 Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years experience.


.1 Fire Rated Door and Panel Construction: Conform to ASTM E2074.

.2 Installed Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class.


.1 Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with GANA in manufacturer’s packaging.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS

.1 Coordinate frame installation with size, location, and installation of service utilities.

.2 Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame, and door hardware installation.

.3 Sequence installation to ensure wire connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner.

PART 2 Products

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

.1 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Baron Metal industries Inc., Daybar Industries Limited. Or Fleming Steel Doors and Frames.


.2 Roll-up Service Doors and Tracks: Cornell Innovative Door Solutions. .1 Model: ESD 10.

.3 Garage Doors: .1 New glazed sections to match existing.

2.2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

.1 General .1 All materials under work of this Section, including but not limited to,

primers, are to have low VOC content limits. .2 Wherever possible, metals used in work of this Section are to contain

recycled content

.2 Steel: ASTM A568/A568M, Class 1; Commercial grade steel, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A653/A653M, ZF075 satin coat finish.

.3 Minimum base steel thickness .1 Frames 1.6 mm .2 Typical doors 1.6 mm. .3 Interior stiffeners 0.9 mm .4 Lock/strike reinforcements 1.6 mm .5 Hinge reinforcements 2.7 mm. .6 All other reinforcement 1.6 mm .7 Top and bottom channels 1.2 mm .8 Glazing stops 0.9 mm .9 Guard boxes 0.9 mm .10 Jamb spreaders 0.9 mm

.4 Top caps and thermal breaks: CGSB 41-GP-19Ma; Rigid PVC extrusions.

.5 Primer: CAN/CGSB 1.198

.6 Core material:. .1 Interior and fire rated doors: Mineral fibre insulation to CAN/ULC S702,

Type1A; 24 kg/m3. .2 Exterior doors: Rigid poly/isocyanuate, closed cell insulation, 32

kg/m3,thermal value: RSI 1.9.

.7 Screws: Stainless steel screws with countersunk flat head.

.8 Door silencers: Type 6-180, black neoprene.

.9 Frame anchors: .1 Frames in masonry: 1.2 mm minimum, adjustable T-strap jamb anchors. .2 Labelled frames: In accordance with ULC requirements.

.10 Floor anchors: 1.6 mm minimum adjustable floor clip angles with 2 holes for anchorage to floor.


.11 Labels for fire doors and door frame: Brass plate, riveted to door and door frame.

.12 Glass and glazing: .1 45 minutes fire-rated glazing materials installed in fire rated door. .2 Manufacturer: FireLite® as supplied by Precision Glass Services Inc.,

905-731-7800. .3 Supply labour and material to install fire-rated glazing as per

manufacture’s instruction.

.13 Fabrication: .1 Astragals in the following paragraph may also be specified in the

hardware section. .2 Fabricate doors with hardware reinforcement welded in place. .3 Attach fire rated label to each fire rated door unit. .4 Fabricate frames as welded unit. .5 Prepare frames for silencers. Provide three single silencers for single

doors on strike side. .6 Configure exterior doors with special profile to receive recessed

weatherstripping.

.14 Finish: .1 Steel Sheet: Galvanized to ASTM A653. .2 Primer: Baked. .3 Factory Finish: Baked enamel. Colour to be determined.

2.3 ROLL-UP SERVICE DOORS AND TRACKS

.1 Design Requirement: .1 Cycle Life: Standard construction for normal use of up to 20 cycles per

day maximum and an overall maximum of 50,000 operating cycles for the life of the door.

.2 Safety: Chain operated doors shall be designed so that the door immediately stops upward or downward travel and is maintained in a stationary position when the hand chain is released by user.

.2 Curtain: Standard curtain configuration. .1 Slates: Galvanized Steel: No. 5F, 22 gauge. Grade 40 steel, ASTM

A653 galvanized steel zinc coating with Bottom Bar extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5, min. height 3 3/8” min. base thickness 3/16”, min. width 4”.

.2 Finish: GalvaNex Coating System. ASTM A653 galvanized base coating treated with dual process rinsing agents in preparation for chemical bonding baed-on base coat and gray baked-on polyester enamel finish coat.

.3 Endlocks: Alternate slates each secured with two 6.35mm rivets. Fabricate interlocking sections with high strength nylon.

.4 Bottom Bar:


.1 Standard Bottom Bar 21.5’ DBG and smaller. Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5, min. height 3 3/8” min. base thickness 3/16”, min. width 4”.

.2 Finish: Powder coat. Zirconium pre-treatment followed by a gray baked-on polyester powder coat; minimum 2.5 mils (0.065mm) cured film thickness.

.5 Guides: .1 Fabrication: Minimum 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) structural steel angles.

Provide windlock bars of same material when windlocks are required to meet specified wind load. Top of inner and outer guide angles to be flared outwards to form bellmouth for smooth entry of curtain into guides. Provide removable guide stoppers to prevent over travel of curtain and bottom bar.

.2 Configuration: Standard guide configuration.

.3 Finish: Powder Coat (Stock Colors): Zirconium pre-treatment followed by a gray baked-on polyester powder coat; minimum 2.5 mils (0.065 mm) cured film thickness

.6 Counterbalance Shaft Assembly: .1 Barrel: Steel pipe capable of supporting curtain load with maximum

deflection of 0.03 inches per foot (2.5 mm per meter) of width .2 Spring Balance: Oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion spring

assembly designed for proper balance of door to ensure that maximum effort to operate will not exceed 25 lbs (110 N). Provide wheel for applying and adjusting spring torque

.7 Brackets: .1 Fabricate from minimum 3/16 inch (5 mm) steel plate with permanently

lubricated ball or roller bearings at rotating support points to support counterbalance shaft assembly and form end closures

.2 Powder Coat (Stock Colors): Zirconium pre-treatment followed by a gray baked-on polyester powder coat; minimum 2.5 mils (0.065 mm) cured film thickness

.8 Hood: .1 Minimum 24 gauge galvanized steel with reinforced top and bottom

edges. Provide minimum 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) steel intermediate support brackets.

.2 Finish: GalvaNex™ Coating System (Stock Colors): ASTM A 653 galvanized base coating treated with dual process rinsing agents in preparation for chemical bonding baked-on base coat and gray baked-on polyester enamel finish coat

.9 Operation: .1 Manual ControlGard Chain Hoist: Provide chain hoist operator with

endless steel chain, chain pocket wheel and guard, geared reduction unit, and chain keeper secured to guide. Chain hoist to include integral brake mechanism that will immediately stop upward or downward travel and maintain the door in a stationary position when the hand chain is released by the user.


.10 Accessories: .1 Padlockable slide bolt on coil side of bottom bar at each jamb extending

into slots in guides. Provide interlock switches on Motor operated units.

2.4 GARAGE DOORS

.1 General: .1 Contractor to confirm production information of existing garage door and

propose new full height glazed sections compatible to existing system. .2 Upgrade existing spring to accommodate final door weight if required. .3 Supply of glazed sections and spring to be drawn against cash allowance.

Labour to complete scope of work is part of base bid. .4 Existing functionality of garage door operation system shall not be

compromised. Same opening and closing speed is expected.

.2 Factory sealed insulated glazed units with one-way privacy film on the interior side.

.3 Factory Finish: Colour to matched existing.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION - GENERAL

.1 Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

.2 Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

.1 Install doors, frames and glazing in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

.2 Set and secure frame and trim components in place, plumb and level. Set exposed fasteners and apply wood filler.

.3 Coordinate installation of glass and glazing.

.4 Machine cut for hardware.

.5 Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware specified.

.6 Touch-up factory finished doors.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES - GENERAL

.1 Maximum variation of frame from true position:1.5mm.

.2 Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 3 mm measured with straight edge, corner to corner, over an imaginary 915 x 2130 mm surface area.


.3 Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 3 mm measured with straight edge or taut string, top to bottom, over an imaginary 915 x 2130 mm surface area.

.4 Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 3 mm measured with straight edge or taut string, edge to edge, over an imaginary 915 x 2130 mm surface area.

3.4 ADJUSTING - GENERAL

.1 Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.

.2 Adjust closer for full closure.

END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 08 41 13 Toronto, ON. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS SBA Project No. 18010 Page 1

PART 1 General


.1 Supply of labour and material to complete the Work as shown on the drawings and as specified herein including not limited to the following:

.1 Removal and disposal of existing windows, frames and sealant.

.2 Thermally broken, stick-built glazed aluminum entrances and storefronts system.

.3 Factory manufactured sealed glazing units

.4 Perimeter sealants

.5 Metal flashing.


.1 Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 Aluminum Association (AA) - DAF 45 2003, Designation System For Aluminum Finishes.

.2 AAMA-501-2005, Methods of Test for Exterior Walls.

.3 AAMA-2603-2013, Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

.4 AAMA-2604-2013, Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

.5 AAMA-2605-2013, Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

.6 AAMA CW DG-1-96, Aluminum Curtain Wall Design Guide Manual.

.7 AAMA CW-10-2012, Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site.

.8 AAMA CW-11-1985, Design Windloads for Buildings and Boundary Layer Wind Tunnel Testing.

.9 AAMA-TIR A1-2004, Sound Control for Fenestration Products.


.10 ASTM A653 / A653M – 09], Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

.11 ASTM B209-2010, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

.12 ASTM B221-2013, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

.13 ASTM C612 – 2014, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.

.14 ASTM E283 2012, Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.

.15 ASTM E331 2009, Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

.16 ASTM E413 – 04, Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.

.17 ASTM E1105 – 2008, Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference.

.18 ASTM D2240 – 2010, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer Hardness.

.19 CAN/CGSB-12.8-97, Insulating Glass Units.

.20 CAN/CGSB-12.20-M89, Structural Design of Glass for Buildings.

.21 CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87, Sealing Compound, One-Component, Elastomeric, Chemical Curing.

.22 CAN/CSA-S157 2005, Strength Design in Aluminum.

.23 CAN/CSA-S136–2007, North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

.24 CAN/CSA W59.2 M1991(R2003), Welded Aluminum Construction.

.25 CCD 45 1995, Sealants and Caulking Compounds.

.26 CAN/ULC-S710.1 2005, Standard for Thermal Insulation – Bead-Applied One Component Polyurethane Air Sealant Foam, Part 1: Materials Standard for Thermal Insulation - Bead - Applied One Component Polyurethane Air Sealant Foam, Part 1: Materials.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

.1 Thermally broken, aluminum entrances and storefronts system of tubular aluminum sections with self supported framing, shop fabricated, factory


prefinished, vision glass, related flashings and anchorage and attachment devices.

.2 Ensure assembled system design permits re-glazing of individual glass and from exterior without requiring removal of structural mullions.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Design aluminum entrances and storefronts to meet OBC 3.4.6.6 Guards, sentence 7 (b), OBC 4.1.5.14 Loads on Guards and OBC 4.1.5.16 Loads on Walls Acting as Guards.

.2 Design curtain wall to AAMA CW-DG-1.

.1 Design glazed aluminum entrances and storefronts following rainscreen principles.

.2 Ensure horizontal members are sealed to vertical members to form individual compartments in accordance with rainscreen principles.

.3 Ventilate and pressure equalize air space outside exterior surface of insulation to exterior.

.3 Design aluminum components to CAN/CSA S157.

.4 Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by pressure and suction of wind, acting normal to plane of wall using design pressure of 0.95 kPa (20 psf) to AAMA CW 11.

.1 Design for expansion and contraction caused by cycling temperature range of 95 degrees C over 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components.

.2 Thermal expansion: Ensure system can withstand temperature differential of 85 degrees C and is able to accommodate interior and exterior system expansion and contraction without damage to components or deterioration of seals.

.3 Design vertical expansion joints with baffled overlaps and compressed resilient air seal laid between mullion ends.

.4 Ensure system is designed to accommodate:

.1 Movement within curtain wall assembly.

.2 Movement between system and perimeter framing components.

.3 Dynamic loading and release of loads.

.4 Deflection of structural support framing.

.5 Creep of concrete structural members.

.4 Limit mullion deflection to flexure limit of glass L/175 maximum with full recovery of glazing materials.


.5 Deadload prevention: Design system with separate, integrated support for insulating glass units.

.6 Sound attenuation through wall system (exterior to interior): STC 33 ASTM E413.

.7 Glass dimensions: Size glass units to CAN/CGSB-12.20.

.8 Flatness criteria: 6 mm (0.25 inches) maximum in 6 m (20 feet) for each panel.

.9 Air infiltration: 0.3 L/s/m2 (0.63 cfm) maximum of wall area to ASTM E283 at differential pressure across assembly of 300 Pa (0.044 psi).

.10 Water infiltration: None to ASTM E331 differential pressure across assembly of 720 Pa (0.104 psi).

.11 Ensure interior surfaces have no condensation before exposed edges of sealed units reach dew point temperatures during testing to AAMA 501.

.12 Maintain continuous air barrier and vapour retarder throughout building envelope and curtain wall assembly.

.13 Ensure no vibration harmonics, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal movement, thermal movement transmitted to other building elements, loosening, weakening, or fracturing of attachments or components of system occur.

.14 Reinforce curtain wall system to accommodate window washing guide rails where indicated.



.2 Product Data: Submit product data including manufacturer’s literature for glazed aluminum curtain wall extruded members, panels, components and accessories, indicating compliance with specified requirements and material characteristics.

.1 Submit list on curtain wall manufacturer’s letterhead of materials, components and accessories to be incorporated into Work.

.2 Include product names, types and series numbers.

.3 Include contact information for manufacturer and their representative for this Project.

.3 Test Reports:

.1 Submit relevant test report prepared by accredited independent testing laboratory, showing compliance with the design criteria of this section. Screen and glazing for Door #103-N1 to be designed to meet OBC 3.4.6.6 Guards, sentence 7(b), OBC 4.1.5.14 Loads on Guards and OBC 4.1.5.16 Loads on Walls Acting as Guards.

.2 Submit test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties including air infiltration, water infiltration and structural performance.


.4 Shop Drawings: Submit drawings stamped and signed by Professional Engineer registered or licensed in the Province of Ontario. Include on shop drawings:

.1 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts system and component dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, adjacent construction, anchor details anticipated deflection under load, affected related Work, weep drainage network, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required. Indicate location of manufacturer's nameplates.

.2 Show size and location of seismic restraints. Include seismic design calculations.

.3 Include details of fasteners between interior and exterior extrusions ensuring no penetratrion of thermal break or thermal bridging.

.4 Refer to approved Hardware Schedule for all required door and frame preparation.

.5 Submit all three shop drawing packages (approved Hardware Schedule, Metal Door and Frame and Aluminum Entrance Storefronts) at the same time for review.

.6 Submit Installer Qualification letter. Company specializing in performing the work of this section five (5) years documented and similar experience, approved by manufacturer.

.7 Samples:

.1 Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm sample sections showing prefinished aluminum surface, finish, colour and texture, and including section of infill panel.

.2 Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm sample sections of insulating glass unit showing glazing materials and edge and corner details.

.8 Field Reports: Submit manufacturer’s field reports within 3 days of manufacturer representatives site visit and inspection.

.9 Operation and Maintenance Data: Supply maintenance data for curtain wall for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 10 - Closeout Submittals.


.1 Perform Work in accordance with AAMA - Aluminum Curtain Wall Design Guide Manual.

.2 Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the Province of Ontario.


.1 Delivery and Acceptance Requirements:


.1 Deliver material in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Product Requirements.

.2 Deliver glazed aluminum curtain wall materials and components in manufacturer’s original packaging with identification labels intact and in sizes to suit project.

.2 Material Handling: To AAMA CW-10.

.3 Storage and Handling Requirements: Store materials off ground and protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer.

.1 Material storage: To AAMA CW-10.

.4 Remove waste packaging materials from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.

.5 Collect and separate for disposal paper and plastic material in appropriate on-site storage containers for recycling.

1.9 COORDINATION

.1 Co-ordination: Co-ordinate work of this Section with work of other trades for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays.

1.10 WARRANTY

.1 Manufacturer’s warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to and not intended to limit other rights Owner may have under Contract Conditions.

.2 Warranty period: 2 years commencing on Date of Substantial Performance of Work.

.3 Work in general: Five year warranty against defects and failure of system, and to remain completely weathertight and air and water leak proof within the tolerances and limits specified.

.4 Sealed Insulated units: Ten year warranty against breakage due to faulty workmanship or materials, loss of air seal and condensation.

.5 Laminated finish: Five year warranty against peeling, checking, blistering or cracking, and be nonconvertible; fading shall be within ±5 NBS. (National Bureau of Standards, reflectance value for fading)

PART 2 Products

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

.1 Alumicor Limited 290 Humberline Drive, Toronto, Ontario, Canada M9W 5S2


Phone: (416) 745-4222 or (877) ALUMICOR e-mail: [email protected] www.Alumicor.com.

.1 FlushGlaze BF 3400 series storefront with Thermaporte 7700 series storefront door.

2.2 MATERIALS

.1 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts System and Components:

.1 Extruded aluminum: To ASTM B221, 6063 alloy with T6 temper.

.2 Sheet aluminum: To ASTM B209, utility grade for unexposed surfaces.

.3 Air barrier liner: Reinforce panels to maintain flat surface.

.1 Concealed locations: 0.952 mm (20 gauge) steel sheet with 458 g/m2 (1.25 oz/sq.ft) galvanized coating and corners sealed at concealed locations.

.2 Interior exposed locations: 1.588 mm (16 gauge) clear anodized aluminum sheet.

.4 Fasteners, screws and bolts: Tamperproof, cadmium plated stainless steel 400 series to meet curtain wall requirements and as recommended by manufacturer.

.5 Anchors: Ensure anchors have three-way adjustment.

.7 Thermal Break: Glass fibre reinforced polyamide porthole extrusion.

.8 Doors: Aluminum-framed swing door with glass insert suitable for inclusion in aluminum-framed storefront system, constructed and finished to match storefront.

2.3 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS

.1 Sealed insulating glass units: .1 Outerlite: 6mm clear float glass with low-# coating on surface two. .2 12mm air space, 90% argon and 10% air filled. Performance values as

follows: .1 Visible light transmittance: 72% .2 U-Values: Winter nighttime -0.24 .3 Shading coefficient: 0.44. .4 Solar heat gain coefficient: 0.39

.3 Innerlite: 6mm clear float glass.

.2 Glazing compound: 1 part clear silicone. GE Canada "Silpruf SCS 2000", Dow Corning "795" or Tremco "Spectrum 2".

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 08 41 13 Toronto, ON. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS SBA Project No. 18010 Page 8 2.4 SEALANTS

.1 Sealant: One part silicone neutral cure low modulus sealant, GE Silicones "Silpruf SCS 2000" or equivalent by Dow Corning. Colour as selected by the Consultant from standard colour selection.

2.5 FABRICATION

.1 Do aluminum welding to CAN/CSA W59.2.

.2 Fabricate aluminum assemblies of extruded sections to sizes and profiles indicated.

.1 Ensure vertical and horizontal members are tubular extrusions designed for shear block corner construction.

.2 Frame: 114.3mm x 50.8mm.

.3 Structural mullion: 114.3mm x 50.8mm

.4 Door: 43mm thk

.5 Cap depth sizes: size to suit

.7 Structural silicone joints where indicated.

.8 Ensure caps for mullion assemblies are constructed without gap.

.3 Construct units square, plumb and free from distortion, waves, twists, buckles or other defects detrimental to performance or appearance.

.1 Ensure frame is fabricated with separate, integrated support for insulating glass unit.

.2 Do glazing in accordance with Section 08 80 00 – Glazing.

.3 Site glazing is permitted.

.4 Fabricate aluminum entrance and storefronts system with minimum clearances and shim spacing around panel perimeter and ensure installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal is enabled.

.5 Accurately fit and secure joints and corners.

.1 Ensure joints are flush, hairline, and weatherproof.

.6 Prepare curtain wall to receive anchor devices.

.7 Use only concealed fasteners

.1 Ensure fasteners do not penetrate thermal break.

.2 Where fasteners cannot be concealed, countersunk screws finished to match adjacent material may be used upon receipt of written approval from Consultant.

.8 Prepare components to receive doors and openings as indicated.

.9 Reinforce head rail of interior components to receive track brackets and attachments as indicated.


.10 Reinforce framing members for exterior imposed loads where required.

.11 Visible manufacturer’s labels are not permitted.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

.1 Gasketing: Silicone compatible rubber or extruded silicone gaskets.

.2 Setting Blocks: 85 +/- 5 neoprene, Shore A Durometer hardness.

.3 Spacers: 55 +/- silicone, Shore A Durometer hardness.

.4 Flashings: 3 mm (0.125 inches) thick aluminum flashing to profiles indicated and in accordance with Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

.5 Liquid Foam Insulation: Single component, moisture cure, low expansion rate spray-in-place polyurethane liquid foam insulation to ULC-S710.1 and in accordance with manufacturer’s written recommendations.

.6 Miscellaneous Components: Covers, copings, special flashings, filler pieces, termination pieces, cap closures, expansion joint covers, and metal bellows to match curtain wall system as indicated.

2.7 FINISHES

.1 Laminated Colour Finishes:

.1 Interior exposed aluminum surfaces: thermosetting acrylic enamel to AAMA 2603, 0.8 mils minimum overall dry film thickness.

.1 Acceptable Products: Duracron by PPG in colour as selected by Consultant from manufacturer's full range.

.2 Finish exposed metal fasteners, if applicable, to related aluminum surfaces.

.2 Exterior exposed aluminum surfaces: 70% Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 fluoropolymer resin systems, ceramic pigments and other select inorganic pigments to AAMA 2605, 1.2 mils minimum overall dry film thickness.

.1 Acceptable Products: Duranar by PPG in colour as selected by Consultant from manufacturer's full range.

.2 Finish exposed metal fasteners, if applicable, to related aluminum surfaces.

.3 Colour: TBD

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 08 41 13 Toronto, ON. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS SBA Project No. 18010 Page 10 PART 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for curtain wall installation in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

.1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of Consultant.

.2 Inform Consultant of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery.

.3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Consultant.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install aluminum entrances and storefront in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

.2 Do aluminum welding to CAN/CSA W59.2.

.3 Attach frame assemblies to structure plumb and level, free from warp, and allow for sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities.

.1 Maintain dimensional tolerances and align with adjacent work.

.2 Use alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten elements to building structure.

.3 Clean welded surfaces and apply protective primer to field welds and adjacent surfaces.

.4 Install thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.

.5 Install sill flashings.

.6 Co-ordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air barrier and vapour barriers.

.7 Install liquid foam insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier.

.8 Install insulating glass units.

.9 Install perimeter sealant to method required to achieve performance criteria, backing materials, and installation criteria in accordance with Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Coordinate field inspection in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.


.2 Site Installation Tolerances:

.1 Variation from plumb: 12 mm per 30 m maximum.

.2 Misalignment of two adjacent panels or members: 0.8 mm maximum.

.3 Sealant space between curtain wall and adjacent construction: 13 mm maximum.

3.4 CLEANING

.1 Progress Cleaning: Perform cleanup as work progresses in accordance with Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning and Waste Processing.

.1 Leave work area clean end of each day.

.2 Final Cleaning: Upon completion, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools, and equipment.

3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

.1 Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.

.2 Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by glazed aluminum curtain wall installation.

END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 08 54 10 Toronto, ON. FIBREGLASS WINDOWS SBA Project No. A18010 Page 1

PART 1 General


.1 Supply of labour and material to complete the Work as shown on the drawings and as specified herein including not limited to the following: .1 Factory fabricated windows with fixed and operating sashes. .2 Factory glazing. .3 Operating hardware and insect screens. .4 Perimeter sealant. .5 Removal and disposal of existing windows, frames and sealant. .6 Metal flashing.


.1 Section 01 73 30 – Cutting and Patching

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 ASCE 7 - Calculation of Wind Loads.

.2 ASTM E283 - Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.

.3 ASTM E330 - Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

.4 ASTM E331 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

.5 ASTM E1105 - Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference.

.6 FS L-S-125 - Screening, Insect, Nonmetallic.

.7 FS RR-W-365 - Wire Fabric (Insect Screening).

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

.1 Windows: Fibreglass sections, factory fabricated, vision glass, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.

.2 Configuration: Fixed, non-operable and outward opening, top hinged sashes.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Design and fabricate windows to CAN/CSA A440-00 and to the following minimum criteria


.1 Air leakage: A3

.2 Water leakage: B1

.3 Structural: C4

.2 Deflection: Limit member deflection to 1/200 with full recovery of glazing materials.

.3 Assembly: System to accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement between window and perimeter framing, deflection of lintel.

.4 Thermal Resistance of Assembly (Excluding Vision Areas): minimum U-value 1.43 W/m2/C as per CSA-A440.2.

.5 Water Leakage: None when measured in accordance with ASTM E331.

.6 System Internal Drainage: Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to the exterior by a weep drainage network.



.2 Product Data: Provide component dimensions, anchorage and fasteners, glass, and internal drainage details.

.3 Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, affected related Work; installation requirements; and operation for each window type. All masonry opening/rough opening to be site measured.

.4 Installer’s qualification: use only Inline Fibreglass authorized installer. Submit letter verifying each installer’s experience with work similar to this section. Minimum five (5) years of experience for individual installer is required.

.5 Submit one (1) sample of operating hardware.

.6 Provide field mock-ups of the following for window in Dormitory 219: .1 Existing condition of metal drip flashing .2 New metal drip flashing. .3 New window complete with glazing unit. .4 Perimeter sealant .5 Foam insulation .6 Continuation of vapour barrier .7 Make good of wall, header and sill


.1 Manufacturer and Installer: Company specializing in manufacturing fibreglass windows with minimum five (5) years documented experience.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 08 54 10 Toronto, ON. FIBREGLASS WINDOWS SBA Project No. A18010 Page 3 1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

.1 Convene one week before starting Work of this section.


.1 Section 01 61 00 – Product Requirements.

.2 Protect factory finished surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.


.1 Section 01 61 00 – Product Requirements.

.2 Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 5 degrees Celsius.

.3 Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of sealants.

1.11 WARRANTY

.1 Section 01 78 10 – Closeout Submittals.

.2 Provide an unconditional written warranty for material and workmanship covering the repair and replacement of defective Work for a period of five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion of the Project. Promptly correct any defects or deficiencies which become apparent within warranty period. Warranty shall include coverage for degradation of colour finish.

.3 Notwithstanding the generality of the following, leakage, failure to stay in place, undue expansion damage, delamination, buckling and splitting seams will be judged as defective Work.

PART 2 Products

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

.1 Inline Fibreglass Ltd; (416) 679- 1171. Product: 325 series.

2.2 MATERIALS

.1 All frame and sash profiles are made from Pultruded Fibreglass, having a nominal wall thickness of 2.3 mm (0.090 inch) with minimum glass content of 60%. Non-structural accessory members are permitted to be in vinyl or aluminum and are identified as such.

.2 Fasteners: Stainless steel.

2.3 COMPONENTS

.1 Frames: 1 1/2 inch wide x 3 1/2 inch deep profile, complete with brick mould as per drawings.


.2 Mullions: 2 11/16 inch wide x 3 1/2 inch deep profile.

.3 Insect Screen Frame: Rolled aluminum frame of rectangular sections; with friction fit corner keys; nominal size similar to operable glazed unit.

.4 Insect Screens: screen mesh, glass fibre strands.

.5 Operable Sash Weather Stripping: heavy duty rated, resilient PVC; permanently resilient, profiled to effect weather seal.

.6 Fasteners: Stainless steel.

2.4 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS

.1 Sealed insulating glass units: .1 Outerlite: 6mm clear float glass with low-# coating on surface two. .2 12mm air space, 90% argon and 10% air filled. Performance values as

follows: .1 Visible light transmittance: 72% .2 U-Values: Winter nighttime -0.24 .3 Shading coefficient: 0.44. .4 Solar heat gain coefficient: 0.39

.3 Innerlite: 6mm clear float glass.

.2 Glazing compound: 1 part clear silicone. GE Canada "Silpruf SCS 2000", Dow Corning "795" or Tremco "Spectrum 2".

.3 Glazing Accessories .1 Spacer shims and setting blocks: Neoprene, Shore "A" Durometer

hardness 70 90, 100 mm long, wide enough to extend from fixed stop to opposite face of glass and of height suitable to provide adequate glazing "bite" for setting blocks. Neoprene, Shore "A" 40 to 50 Durometer hardness, of adequate thickness to provide correct glass to face clearance of at least 3 mm for spacer shims. For glass in fire rated doors (screens) use ULC approved fire resistant setting blocks and spacer shims.

.2 Glazing tape: 440 polyisobutylene-butyl tape by Tremco Ltd.

2.5 SEALANT MATERIALS

.1 Sealant and Backing Materials: .1 Perimeter Sealant: Polyurethane Type. .2 Manufacturer: Tremco, Inc., Commercial Sealants and Waterproofing

Division An RPM Company (866)321-6357 .3 Sealant Used Within System (Not Used for Glazing): As per

manufacturers written recommendations.

2.6 HARDWARE

.1 Operator: Geared rotary handle fitted to projecting sash arms with limit stops.


.2 Projecting Sash Arms: Zinc plated steel, friction pivot joints with nylon bearings.

.3 Locks: Multi point metal cam locks.

2.7 FABRICATION

.1 Frame and sash corners are connected with molded reinforced polymer components and mechanically secured. Joints are factory sealed and neatly fitted together. The perimeter of open-back frames shall be filled with insulation.

.2 Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet allowing installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.

.3 Arrange fasteners to be concealed from view.

.4 Permit internal drainage weep holes and channels to migrate moisture to exterior. Provide internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes.

.5 Assemble insect screen frame, and reinforced frame corners. Fit mesh taut into frame and secure.

.6 Weatherstrip operable units.

.7 Factory glaze window units.

2.8 FINISHES

.1 Isocyanate-free 2 part Polymer Enamel with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils with a medium gloss of 25-55. Finish shall resist chipping, blistering, chalking, discolouration and aging under normal atmospheric conditions.Colour: commercial Brown.

.2 Screens: Frames to match windows. Mesh to be selected from manufacturers standard colours.

.3 Operators: Colour to match frames.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Site measure ALL window openings prior to preparation of shop drawings

.2 Verification of existing conditions before starting Work.

.3 Verify wall openings and adjoining materials are ready to receive Work of this section.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 08 54 10 Toronto, ON. FIBREGLASS WINDOWS SBA Project No. A18010 Page 6 3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install window frames, glass and glazing and hardware in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Glazing and hardware to be factory installed.

.2 Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities.

.3 Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent Work.

.4 Make good of stools as per Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry.

.5 Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Install foam insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. Additional anchorage may be required to prevent bowing.

.6 Install perimeter sealant on interior and exterior. Backing materials, and installation criteria in accordance with Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants.


.1 Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 1/16 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/8 inches per 10 ft, whichever is less.

3.4 ADJUSTING

.1 Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure.

3.5 CLEANING

.1 Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning and Waste Processing.

.2 Remove protective material from factory finished surfaces.

.3 Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer; rinse and wipe surfaces clean.

.4 Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant manufacturer.

3.6 SCHEDULES

.1 Refer to drawings for window schedule.

END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 08 71 00 Toronto, ON DOOR HARDWARE SBA Project No. 18010 Page 1 PART 1 General


.1 Cost to supply Hardware to be included within Section 01 21 00 Allowances.

Installation to be included in Tender Bid.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 08 11 13 Metal Doors and Frames .2 Section 08 41 13 Aluminum Entrance and Storefronts .3 Division 26 Electrical

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 BHMA, Builders Hardware Manufacturing Association

1.4 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedure. .2 Prior to starting work of this Section, confirm name of Architectural Hardware

Consultant retained by Hardware Supplier. .3 In conjunction with Consultant, Hardware Consultant to develop Hardware Schedule

and provide detailed Product data for review. .4 Product data: Submit manufacturer's Product data indicating catalogue cuts, finishes,

hardware specifications, compliance with reference standards, transportation, storage, handling, installation requirements and coordination with new and existing doors and frames.

.5 Upon completion of accepted Hardware Schedule, provide Shop Drawings to Consultant for review. Ensure that prior to submitting shop drawings to Consultant that hardware has been coordinated with door and frame shop drawings for both metal doors and aluminum entrance storefronts. Submit all three shop drawing packages (approved Hardware Schedule, Metal Door and Frame and Aluminum Entrance Storefronts) at the same time.

.6 Shop drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings and complete hardware list indicating:

.1 Door locations, sizes, hardware manufacturer’s catalogue numbers, finish symbols and quantities required.

.2 Locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware.

.2 Coordinate and supply templates and required information to door and frame manufacturer and aluminum entrance and storefronts manufacturer to enable

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 08 71 00 Toronto, ON DOOR HARDWARE SBA Project No. 18010 Page 2

accurate sizes, locations of cut-outs and reinforcement for hardware. .3 Submit templates to required trade (s) to arrange for provisions for accurate

setting and fitting of hardware.

.7 Keying Schedule: In conjunction with Consultant and Owner, Architectural Hardware Consultant to develop Hardware Schedule and provide detailed Product data for review.

.8 Closeout submittals: .1 Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 78 10 Closeout Submittals

.1 Maintenance data.

.2 Operating instructions and safety precautions.

.3 Parts list with name and address of supplier.

.4 Lubrication schedule and type of lubricant recommended.

.5 Keys, tools and special devices.

.6 Inspection procedures related to preventive maintenance.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 General

.1 Manufacturers: Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware and registered with BHMA.

.2 Hardware supplier: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware and acceptable to manufacturer.

.2 Certifications:

.1 Architectural Hardware Consultant to prepare the Hardware Schedule, Specifications and Keying Schedule.

1.6 WARRANTY

.1 Provide five (5) year warranty for all door hardware components.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .1 Be responsible for packaging of hardware, on a set by set basis. As material is

received from various manufacturers identify it to correspond to Hardware List symbols.

.2 Label packages legibly, indicating manufacturer's number, types, sizes, opening

number and Hardware List reference number. Wrap hardware and include in package, screws, bolts and fastening necessary for correct installation. If hardware package is not complete, pay additional charges incurred by installer.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 08 71 00 Toronto, ON DOOR HARDWARE SBA Project No. 18010 Page 3

.3 Deliver hardware to site packaged, labelled and cross-referenced to hardware list for each item and its’ scheduled installation location.

.4 Accept products of this Section on site and that each item is undamaged. .5 Catalogue and store hardware in secure area.

PART 2 Products 2.1 GENERAL

.1 Carefully check and verify Hardware List against Hardware Schedule and Drawings to

ensure that hardware listed can be used as specified. Inform Consultant of concerns regarding quality, quantity, operation or function of hardware selected: .1 Verify hand of doors, examine details on Contract Drawings and at Site to ensure

hardware supplied can be correctly installed and is correct for Work as constructed.

.2 Select hardware in accordance with applicable codes and regulations and to approval of local authority having jurisdiction.

.3 Replace and pay for defective hardware including hardware which was incorrectly selected, and remedial and installation costs.

.2 Ensure that hardware selected will function correctly, meets Contract requirements, Ontario Building Code and authorities having jurisdiction.

.3 Ensure that each hardware item is of same type, design and by same manufacturer. .4 Manufacturer's names or trademarks are not permitted on exposed surfaces of

hardware. .5 Include in packing slip a list of parts, name of supplier and door number in which lock

is to be installed. .6 Hardware for fire rated and labelled door and frame assemblies: ULC listed or as

accepted by authorities having jurisdiction. .7 Fire Rated Assemblies:

.1 Hardware: Selected and installed in accordance with applicable codes and regulations, NFPA-80 and to approval of Ontario Fire Marshall.

.2 Fire rated doors: ULC labelled hardware. Submit written certification of conformance to ULC requirements for each type of hardware prior to delivery.

.3 Lock sets and latch sets on fire rated doors: 19 mm throw minimum.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 08 71 00 Toronto, ON DOOR HARDWARE SBA Project No. 18010 Page 4 2.2 ACCESSORIES

.1 Items to be attached to existing and new walls with expandable shields, lag screws,

bolts or other fastening devices as required. Exposed screws: Stainless steel, Phillips or Robertson heads.

2.3 FINISHES

.1 Metal finishes: Free from defects, clean, unstained and of a uniform colour for each

type of finish required. Exposed surfaces and anchors: Specified finish symbol of item.

PART 3 Execution 3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and

applicable codes and regulations. .2 Install hardware in accordance with hardware templates. .3 Adjust fixed and operable hardware for correct clearances and function.

.4 Mount hardware measured from finished floor to centre of hardware, unless indicated otherwise: .1 Top hinge: 250 mm from head of door to top. .2 Bottom hinge: 265 mm from finished floor to bottom of hinge. .3 Intermediate hinge: Equal distance between top and bottom hinge. .4 Locksets, latch sets: 1000 mm. .5 Panic device crossbar: 1000 mm. .6 Push plates: 1100 mm to bottom of plates. .7 Guard bars: 1100 mm. .8 Door pulls: 1100 mm to bottom of pulls. .9 Blank strike: 1450 mm. .10 Blank fronts: 1450 mm

3.2 HARDWARE GROUPS .1 Hardware Groups and keying to be developed in conjunction with Architectural

Hardware Consultant and Consultant/Owner. .2 Refer to Door Schedule for hardware requirements

END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 09 21 16 Toronto, ON. GYPSUM BOARD SBA Project No. 18010 Page 1

PART 1 General


.1 Gypsum board and joint treatment.

.2 Gypsum sheathing.


.1 Section 09 22 16 – Interior Non-Load Bearing Metal Stud Framing

.2 Section 09 30 00 - Tiling

.3 Section 09 91 10 – Paint and Coatings.

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM C36/C36M - Gypsum Wallboard.

.2 ASTM C79/C79M - Treated Core and Non-Treated Core for Gypsum Sheathing Board.

.3 ASTM C442/C442M - Gypsum Backing Board, Gypsum, Coreboard, and Gypsum Shaftliner Board.

.4 ASTM C475 - Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board.

.5 ASTM C630/C630M - Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board.

.6 ASTM C645 - Specifications for Non-Structural Steel Framing Members.

.7 ASTM C665 - Mineral-Fibre Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.

.8 ASTM C754 - Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Board.

.9 ASTM C840 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.

.10 ASTM C931 - Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board.

.11 ASTM C1002 - Steel Self-Piercing, Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.

.12 ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne-Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.

.13 ASTM E119 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

.14 GA 201 (Gypsum Association) - Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings.


.15 GA 214 (Gypsum Association) - Recommended Specification: Levels of Gypsum Board Finish.

.16 GA 216 (Gypsum Association) - Application of Gypsum Board.

.17 GA 600 (Gypsum Association) - Fire Resistance Design Manual.

.18 UL - Fire Resistance Directory.

.19 ITS (Intertek Testing Services) - Certification Listings.


.1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Submit manufacturer's product data indicating:

.1 Performance criteria, compliance with appropriate reference standard, characteristics and limitations;

.2 Product transportation, storage, handling and installation; and Requirements;

.3 WHMIS Material Safety Data Sheets.

.3 Submit written certification stating that structural system is designed for adequate support of electrical fixtures as required by the current bulletin of the Electrical Safety Authority.

.4 Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing, and acoustic seals.


.1 Provide a list of the proposed drywall foreman and drywallers and their respective resumes a minimum one week prior to commencement of the work and include for each person their experience and list of related projects.

.2 Work of this Section to be completed by skilled, qualified and experienced workers trained in the installation of the Work of this Section.

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Do not begin Work of this Section until:

.1 Structural, Mechanical and Electrical Work above the ceiling is complete.

.2 Firestopping, smoke seals and any required repairs to fire separations which will be hidden by the gypsum board is complete and reviewed.

.3 Substrate and ambient temperature is above 15°C.

.4 Relative humidity is below 80 %.

.5 Ventilation is adequate to remove excess moisture.


.2 Install temporary protection and facilities to maintain product manufacturer's and above specification, environmental requirements 24 hours before, during, and 24 hours after installation.


.1 Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies.

PART 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL

.1 All materials under Work of this Section, including but not limited to, sealants, adhesives, and primers are to have low VOC content limits.

.2 Wherever possible, gypsum board, steel studs, ceilings and framing used in work of this Section are to contain recycled content.

.3 Refer to Section 05 40 00 – Cold Formed Metal Framing.

.4 Refer to Section 09 22 16 – Interior Non-Load Bearing Metal Stud Framing

2.2 FRAMING MATERIALS

.1 Studs and Tracks: As specified in Refer to Section 09 22 16 – Interior Non-Load Bearing Metal Stud Framing.

.2 Furring, Framing, and Accessories: ASTM C645, GA-216 and GA-600

.3 Fasteners: ASTM C1002, Type S, GA-216, corrosion resistant.

.4 Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place.

.5 Adhesive: GA-216.

2.3 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS

.1 Fire Rated Gypsum Board: ASTM C36, fire resistive type, UL rated 15.9mm (5/8”) thick, Sheetrock Firecode C Core Gypsum Panels, Mold Tough Firecode X. Maximum length to minimize end joints unless indicated otherwise. Certainteed Gypsum Canada, CGC Inc. or G-P Products.

2.4 CEMENT BOARD MATERIALS

.1 Cement Board: 13mm thick, CGC Durock.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

.1 Acoustic Insulation: Sound Isolation Batts, Roxul Safe “N” Sound.


.2 Acoustic Sealant: CGSB 19-GP-21M; Single component, Non-hardening, non-skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board; synthetic rubber sealant. Acoustical Sealant by Tremco.

.3 Hanger wires: 4.1 mm minimum diameter galvanized pencil rod.

.4 Tie wire: 1.6 mm thick minimum diameter, soft annealed, galvanized steel wire.

.5 Corner Beads: Corner bead, casing bead, and special shapes: Formed from 0.6 mm thick minimum, galvanized steel sheet, designed to be concealed by joint compound.

.6 Edge Trim: GA-201 and GA-216; Type LC

.7 Joint Materials: ASTM C475; GA-201 and GA-216; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, and water.

.8 Control joint strip: Roll formed from galvanized steel sheet, with a tape protected recess, 6 mm wide x 11 mm deep.

.9 Concrete anchors: tie wire sleeve anchors, ‘Redi-Drive TW' by Red Head or approved alternative.

.10 Joint reinforcing tape: ASTM C475; 50 mm wide x 0.25 mm thick, perforated paper, with chamfered edges, unless otherwise recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer.

.11 Bonding adhesive: Type for purpose intended and as recommended and approved by manufacturer.

.12 Joint and patching compound: ASTM C475; Asbestos-free, supplied by manufacturer of gypsum board used.

.13 Fast setting patching compound: ASTM C475; Asbestos-free, Sheetrock or Durabond by CGC Inc., ProRoc products by Certainteed Gypsum Canada or approved alternative.

.14 Access doors: Supplied by other Sections for installation as part of the Work of this Section.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Section 01 70 00 – Examination and Preparation

.2 Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings and instructed by the manufacturer.

3.2 METAL STUD INSTALLATION

.1 Install studs in accordance with ASTM C754, GA-201, GA-216, GA-600 and manufacturer's written instructions.


.2 Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending stud framing through the ceiling to the structure above. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. Provide extended leg ceiling runners.

.3 Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs. Install stud tracks on each side of opening, at frame head height, and between studs and adjacent studs.

.4 Blocking: Bolt or screw steel channels to studs. Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, wood frame opening, toilet accessories, and hardware.

3.3 FURRING FOR FIRE RATINGS

.1 Install furring as required for fire resistance ratings indicated to GA-600 requirements and ULC testing.

3.4 SUSPENSION CEILING FRAMING INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with ASTM C754, GA-201, GA-216 and manufacturer's written instructions.

.2 Coordinate location of hangers with other work.

.3 Install hanger wires plumb and securely anchored to the building structural framing, independent of walls, pipes, ducts, and metal deck; install additional framing and hangers to bridge interference items.

.4 Install hanger wires at 1200 mm maximum centres along carrying channels, not less than 25 mm, and not more than 150 mm from channel ends.

.5 Install additional hangers at lighting fixture and ductwork locations. Do not attach hanger wires to mechanical or electrical equipment. Do not support mechanical and electrical fixtures and fitting on ceiling without the ceiling manufacturer's written acceptance.

.6 Install ceiling framing independent of walls, columns, and above ceiling work.

.7 Laterally brace entire suspension system.

.8 Install main carrying channels transverse to structural framing members. Lap main carrying channels 200 mm minimum at splices and wire each end with two loops and prevent clustering or lining-up of splices.

.9 Install furring channels at 400 mm o.c., not less than 25 mm, and not more than 150 mm from perimeter walls, at openings, at interruptions in ceiling continuity, and at change in plane. Install furring channels to a tolerance of 3 mm maximum in 3600 mm.

.10 Install additional main carrying and furring channels to frame and to reinforce openings such as recessed lighting fixtures, access hatches, ceiling grilles, outlet boxes, ventilating outlets and similar items.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 09 21 16 Toronto, ON. GYPSUM BOARD SBA Project No. 18010 Page 6 3.5 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION

.1 Install resilient channels at maximum 600 mm on centre. Locate joints over framing members. Install on interior face of three washrooms on ground floor level.

.2 Place acoustic insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.

.3 Install acoustic insulation and acoustic sealant within partitions in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Install acoustic sealant at penetrations as required, concealed from view in the final inspection.

3.6 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION

.1 Install gypsum board in accordance with GA-201, GA-216, GA-600 and manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Erect single layer standard gypsum board horizontally. Locate with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing/supporting members.

.3 Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing.

.4 Erect exterior gypsum sheathing horizontally, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over firm bearing.

.5 Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing.

.6 Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board and exterior gypsum soffit board with sealant.

.7 Install gypsum board in lightly butted contact at edges and ends and with 1.6 mm maximum open space between boards; do not force gypsum board into place. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards.

.8 Install gypsum board butting paired tapered edge joints, and mill-cut or field-cut end joints; do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends.

.9 Do not locate joints within 200 mm of corners or openings, except where control joints occur at jamb lines or where openings occur adjacent to corners. Where necessary, place a single vertical joint over the centre of wide openings.

.10 Cut, drill and patch gypsum board as may be necessary to accommodate the Work of other trades.

.11 Fire Separations:

.1 Construct gypsum board assemblies, where located, in accordance with tested assemblies to obtain required or indicated fire rated assemblies. As a minimum fire separations shall consist of metal framing covered on both sides by fire-rated gypsum board.


.2 Install assemblies tightly to enclosing constructions to maintain integrity of the separations. Install casing beads at all perimeter edges.

3.7 CORNER, CASING, BEADS AND TRIM

.1 Corner reinforcing bead: Install along all external angles, erect plum b, level and with a minimum of joints. Secure with screws at 225 mm o.c. apply filler over flanges flush with nose of the bead and extending at least 75 mm onto surface of board each side of corner. When filler dries, apply a thin coat of topping cement and blend onto adjoining surfaces.

.2 Casing bead: Install where wallboard butts against a surface having no trim concealing the juncture and where shown on drawings. Erect casing beads plumb or level, with minimum joints, and secure with screws at 300 mm o.c. apply filler over flange flush with bead and extending at least 75 mm onto surface of board. When dry, apply a thin coat of topping cement and blend onto adjoining surfaces.

.3 Recess channels and trim: Install recess channels and special metal trim where shown. Secure to substrate. Provide casing beads full height on wallboard edges at recess channels and metal trim.

3.8 JOINT TAPING AND FINISHING

.1 Install reinforcing tape and a minimum of 3 coats of joint compound over gypsum board joints, metal trim and accessories, and screw fasteners in accordance with the gypsum board manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Fill gaps between, and any imperfections in, gypsum boards with joint compound, allow to dry, and sand smooth ready for painting.

.3 Install finished gypsum board Work smooth, seamless, plum b, true, flush, and with square, plumb, and neat corners.

.4 Finish gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840 to the following grades:

.1 Level 0: No taping, finishing, or accessories required. Use above suspended ceilings and within other concealed spaces, unless the assembly is fire rated, sound rated, sound or smoke controlled, or unless the space serves as an air plenum.

.2. Level 1: At joints and interior angles embed tape in joint compound. Leave surface free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. Use above suspended ceilings and within other concealed spaces if the gypsum board assembly is fire rated, sound rated, sound or smoke controlled, or the space serves as an air plenum.

.3 Level 2: At joints and interior angles embed tape in joint compound with one separate coat of joint compound applied over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Use for water resistant gypsum board indicated for use as a substrate for ceramic tile.


.4 Level 3: At joints and interior angles embed tape in joint compound with two separate coats of joint compound applied over all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Apply joint compound smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Use where heavy grade wall coverings are the final decoration.

.5 Level 4: At joints and interior angles embed tape in joint compound with three separate coats of joint compound applied over all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Apply joint compound smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Use for all locations except those indicated for other finish levels.

.6 Level 5: At joints and interior angles embed tape in joint compound with three separate coats of joint compound applied over all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Apply a thin skim coat of joint compound, or a material manufactured especially for this purpose, to the entire surface. Leave surface smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Use where semi-gloss or gloss finish coatings are the final decoration.

3.9 ACCESS DOORS

.1 Install access doors supplied as part of other parts of the Work.

3.10 SITE TOLERANCES

.1 Install metal support systems to ensure that, within a tolerance of +3 mm and -1.5 mm for plaster thickness, finish surfaces will be flat within 3 mm under a 3 m straightedge, and with no variation greater than 1.5 mm in any running 300 mm, and that surface planes shall be within 3 mm of dimensioned location.

3.11 REPAIR

.1 Make good cut-outs for services and other work, fill in defective joints, holes and other depressions with joint compound.

.2 Make good defective work, and ensure that surfaces are smooth, evenly textured and within specified tolerances to receive finish treatments.

END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 09 22 16 Toronto, ON. INTERIOR NON-LOAD BEARING METAL STUD FRAMING SBA Project No. 18010 Page 1

PART 1 General


.1 Non-load bearing steel framing includes non-load bearing steel studs framing members for interior framing systems (eg., partition walls, framed bulkheads, furring, etc.) as well as interior suspension systems (eg., supports for ceilings, suspended bulkheads, etc.).

.2 Framing accessories.


.1 Section 08 12 13 –Metal Doors and Frames

.2 Section 09 12 16 – Gypsum Board

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 National Building Code

.2 Ontario Building Code

.3 ASTM A123/A123M - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.


.5 ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Non-Structural Steel Framing Members.

.6 ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products.

.7 ASTM A924 General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

.8 ASTM A568 Steel Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low Alloy, Hot Rolled and Cold Rolled.

.9 ASTM A792 Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

.10 CAN/CGSB-7.1M Cold Formed Steel Framing Components

.11 CAN/ULC-S101-M89 Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction Materials.

.12 CAN/CGSB-19.21 Sealing and Bedding Compound Acoustical.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 09 22 16 Toronto, ON. INTERIOR NON-LOAD BEARING METAL STUD FRAMING SBA Project No. 18010 Page 2 1.4 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Provide labour, materials, services and equipment necessary to complete installation of the lightweight steel framing system including:

.1 Wall studs subjected to lateral loads (no axial load other than self-weight and the weight of applied finishes.)

.2 Steel bridging.

.3 Top and bottom track.

.4 Head and sill members and jamb studs for wall opening.

.5 Stud, bridging and track connections.

.6 Top and bottom track connections to main structure including details to accommodate floor deflections.

.2 Wall System: .1 Design to provide for movement of components without damage, failure

of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges.

.2 Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings.

1.5 DESIGN CRITERIA

.1 Fire rated assembly walls, where indicated.

.2 Select studs with maximum deflection of L/360 at lateral force of 5psf (240 Pa) for maximum heights indicated.

.3 Select studs for horizontal spacing as noted.

.4 Select studs for application of one or multiple layers of gypsum board as indicated.

.5 Design stud and track connections to accommodate vertical deflection movement of the structure without imposing axial loads onto the framing.

.6 Provide rows of continuous horizontal bridging channels maximum 1500mm on centre to resist applied loads.

.7 Provide additional framing members as required to reinforce and frame openings in partitions.

.8 Use resilient furring channels on one side of wall and acoustical cavity insulation and acoustical insulation and acoustical sealant to achieve minimum STC levels indicated.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 09 22 16 Toronto, ON. INTERIOR NON-LOAD BEARING METAL STUD FRAMING SBA Project No. 18010 Page 3 1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

.1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures

.2 Shop Drawings: .1 Indicate component details, gauges, stud layout, framed openings,

anchorage to structure, type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of other related work.

.2 Describe method for securing studs to tracks, splicing, and for blocking and reinforcement to framing connections.

.3 Product Data: Provide data describing standard framing member materials and finish, product criteria, load charts and limitations.

.4 Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention.


.1 Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C754.

.2 Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five (5) years documented experience supported by written certification by manufacturer.

.3 Design structural elements under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the Province of Ontario.

.4 Form, fabricate, install, and connect components in accordance with ML/SFA 540.

PART 2 Products

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

.1 Bailey Metal Products Limited One Caldari Road Concord, ON L4K 1-800-668-2154

.2 Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 62 00 – Product Exchange Procedures

2.2 MATERIALS

.1 Materials for fire rated assemblies to conform to the requirements of the specified listing.

.2 Stud width(s) to be as indicated and to include minimum 20 gauge factory pre-punched cut outs for services and channel bridging.


.3 Bailey Steel stud framing for screw attachment of gypsum board, roll formed from cold formed steel with either Galvalume or minimum G60 (Z180) galvanized coating.

.4 Top track to be of same material as studs and sized to suit. Leg length of top track to be 50mm.

.5 Bottom track to be of same material as studs and sized to suit stud. Leg length of bottom track to be 124mm.

.6 Bridging channel 38mm x 13mm roll formed from 0.048” (1.22mm) thick cold formed steel with minimum G60 (Z180) galvanized coating or equivalent.

.7 Fasteners to secure metal framing together to be No. 8 x 9/16” Wafer Head Speed Tec Framing Screw.

.8 Resilient channel roll formed from 0.018” (0.46mm) thick cold formed galvanized steel.

.9 Acoustic Sealant: As specified in Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants.

.10 Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SPCC - Paint 20 zinc rich.

2.3 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate assemblies of framed sections to sizes and profiles required.

.2 Fit, reinforce, and brace framing members to suit design requirements.

.3 Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation.

2.4 FINISHES

.1 Studs: Galvanize to Z275.

.2 Tracks and Headers: Galvanize to Z275.

.3 Accessories: Same finish as framing members.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Section 01 70 00 – Examination and Preparation

.2 Verify that rough-in utilities are in proper location.

.3 Fabrication and erection shall conform to the approved shop drawings. Modifications required to accommodate as-built conditions shall be submitted for approval.


.4 Provide necessary studs, framing and furring systems to provide proper support for gypsum board in accordance with good industry practice.

.5 Provide cooperation to other trades to accommodate window and door frames, mechanical and electrical items and any other work required to be incorporated into or coordinated with the framing system.

3.2 ERECTION

.1 Erect partitions requiring fire rating in accordance with requirements of listing

.2 Align tracks at top and bottom of partitions and secure 600mm on centre maximum, and maximum 50mm from each end.

.3 Place studs vertically as indicated and maximum 50 mm. from abutting walls and each side of corners and openings.

.4 Install partition to accommodate vertical deflection of structure without imposing axial loads onto the framing.

.5 Install partitions to underside of structure above as indicated.

.6 Attach studs to track.

.7 Install double studs at jambs and double tracks at heads of door openings, not more than 50mm from each side of opening.

.8 Fabrication corners using a minimum of three studs.

.9 Provide solid blocking, additional framing and reinforcing to support wall mounted fixtures and door stops as indicated.

.10 Install resilient furring channel transverse to framing members. Start rows of channel 50mm up from floor and within 150mm from ceiling. Space rows at maximum 610mm. Locate splices over framing and secure channel ends to framing. Secure to framing with sheet metal framing screws. End joints to be staggered and aligned over framing and each end fastened to framing.

.11 Install acoustical sealant/insulating gasket under tracks.

.12 Finished work to be rigid, secure, square, level, plumb and curved to detailed radius and erected to maintain dimensions and contours.

.13 Coordinate placement of insulation in stud spaces after stud frame erection.


.1 Maximum Variation From True Position: 3 mm in 3 m].

.2 Maximum Variation From Plumb: 3 mm in 3 m.

END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 09 30 00 Toronto, ON. TILING AND CLEANING SBA Project No. A18010 Page 1

Part 1 General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Wall tile.

.2 Floor tile.

.3 Accessories.

.4 Mortar and grout.

.5 Cleaning of existing wall and floor tiles.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants.

1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Section 01 33 10: Submission procedures.

.2 Samples:

.1 Submit two samples 300mm x 300mm in size illustrating each tile and grout colours.

.3 Shop Drawings:

.1 Shop drawing to indicate structural joints, control joints, tile layout, patterns, and colour arrangement.

.2 Perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials.

.3 Setting details including installation requirements for Schluter DITRA

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Conform to TTMAC (Terrazzo Tile and Marble Association of Canada)

Specification Guide 09 30 00, Tile Installation Manual 2012-2014.

.2 Installer's Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three (3) years documented experience.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MANUFACTURERS .1 To be determined.

2.2 MATERIALS .1 Wall Tile: Supply of all wall tiles to be drawn against cash allowance. Refer to

Section 01 21 00 – Allowances.

.1 Lavatory 211: Cut out existing 20 tiles (brown) in existing shower and replace with new. New tile colour and size to match adjacent (white).

.2 New Universal Toilet Rm 107A.

.3 Back splash for Kitchen 129A.


.2 Floor Tile: Supply of all floor tiles to be drawn against cash allowance. Refer to Section 01 21 00 – Allowances.

.1 New Universal Toilet Rm 107A (Type: FL 3A)

.2 Storage Rm 129B (Type: FL3B)

.3 All remaining area as per Dwg. A700 (Type :FL3C)

.3 Base: 100mm high vinyl base. Colour to be determined.

.4 Schluter DITRA membrane (3mm) for floor tile.

.5 Cleaning Product for Existing Floor and Wall Tiles: Alkaline Cleaner, manufacture by MORE Surface Care, www.moresurfacecare.com.

2.3 ACCESSORIES .1 Inside/Outside Wall Tile Corner Trims: Squarejolly SJ, manufactured by

Profilitec. www.profilitec.com. (855) 290-9591.

.2 Thresholds: Refer to Dwg. A700.

.3 Perimeter Joints: Schluter – DILEX-EKE. Colour TBD. Complete with sill seal band around perimeter.

.4 Uncoupling Membrane: Schluter DITRA.

.5 Surface Joints (expansion joints/construction joints/control joints/structural joints): Schluter movement joints product to suit.

2.4 MORTAR MATERIALS - WALL TILE .1 Mortar Materials - Interior: Dry set mortar formulated for thin-set application,

complete with enhancing latex additive.

.1 Product: Kerabond/Keralastic System, manufactured by Mapei Inc.

2.5 MORTAR MATERIALS - FLOOR TILE .1 Mortar Materials - Interior: Unmodified think-set mortar as per ANSI A118.1 as

recommended by Schluter for floor tiles with DITRA.

2.6 GROUT MATERIALS .1 Floor and bases: as per ANSO A118.3, A118.6, A118.7, A118.8 as

recommended by Schluter for floor tiles with DITRA. Colour TBD.

.2 Walls: “Ultra/Colour” by Mapei Inc. Colour TBD.

2.7 ADHESIVE MATERIALS .1 Adhesive: Thinset bond, [organic, water resistant latex type] [chemical resistant,

high temperature type with 100% solids epoxy resin].

2.8 MIXING .1 Mix premanufactured mortars and grout to manufacturer's written instructions.

.2 Mix and proportion cementitious materials for site made [slurry coat], mortar bed and bond coat to recommendations of TTMAC.

http://www.profilitec.com/

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 09 30 00 Toronto, ON. TILING AND CLEANING SBA Project No. A18010 Page 3 Part 3 Execution

3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION .1 Clean and dry surfaces thoroughly. Remove oil, was, grease, dust, dirt, paint,

tar, primers, adhesives, form release agents, curing compound and other foreign materials from substrate surfaces which may prevent or reduce adhesion.

.2 Neutralize any trace of strong acids or alkali from the substrate.

3.2 CONTROL JOINTS .1 Continue control, construction, and cold joints in the structural substrate up

through the tile finish, and align with mortar joints where possible. Review joint locations on site with the Consultant.

.2 Install joint widths to match grout joint widths, except where a minimum width is indicated.

.3 Install control joints in the following typical locations:

.1 Aligned over changes in type of substrate.

.2 At the restraining perimeters such as walls and columns.

.3 Interior area (not subject to sunlight): 6mm minimum width, at 7320 mm o.c. maximum.

.4 Interior areas (subject to sunlight): 6mm minimum width, at 3660 mm o.c. maximum.

.5 As indicated on the Contract Drawings.

.4 Seal control joints in accordance with Section 07 92 00

3.3 LEVELLING BED .1 Install a levelling bed on uneven substrate surfaces, level and plumb substrates

in accordance with the following tolerances:

.1 Vertical surface: 3mm in 2.4 m maximum.

.2 Horizontal surfaces: 6mm in 3 m from finished levels of the surface, or better.

.2 Clean structural substrate control joints and blow-clean with compressed air. Grout fill control joints flush to slab with levelling bed.

3.4 INSTALLATION .1 Verify that new plywood subfloor is properly fastened to the framing members

prior to start installation of floor tiles.

.2 Any levelling of the subfloor must be done prior to installing Schluter-DITRA.

.3 Install tiles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and TTMAC Specification Guide 09300 Tile Installation Manual. Manufacturer's installation instructions govern over TTMAC Installation Manual.

.4 Lay out Work to produce a symmetrical pattern with minimum amount of cutting. Ensure cut tile at room perimeter is not less than ½ full size. Provide 6mm perimeter expansion joints.


.5 Install Schluter DITRA membrane below floor tiles as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

.6 Set tiles in place and rap or beat with a beating block as necessary to ensure a proper bond and to level surface. Align tile for uniform joints and allow to set until firm. Clean excess mortar from surface of tile with a wet cloth or sponge while mortar is fresh.

.7 Adjust joints between units uniform, plumb, straight, even, and true, with adjacent tile flush. Align grout joints in both directions unless indicated otherwise.

.8 Align floor, base and wall grout joints.

.9 Install tile accessory fittings for a complete and fully coordinated tile assembly.

.10 Install wall tile full height unless indicated otherwise.

.11 Cut and fit tile neatly around piping, fittings, projections and around recesses items e.g. washroom accessories. Where surface mounted equipment and accessories are installed on tile surfaces, extend tile over surfaces. Cut edges smooth, even, and free from chipping; chipped and broken edges are not acceptable.

.12 Do not proceed with grouting until minimum 48 hours after tile has set, to prevent displacement of tiles.

.13 Apply grout in accordance with grout manufacturer's directions to produce watertight, filled joints without voids, cracks and excess grout. Thoroughly compact and tool floor grout. Finish grout flush to edge thickness of tile and remove excess grout with soft burlap or sponge moistened with clean water.

3.5 CLEANING OF EXISTING FLLOR AND WALL TILES .1 Assume medium duty dilution ratios.

.2 Follow manufacture’s instruction for usage.

3.6 CLEANING OF NEW TILE INSTALLATION .1 Clean ceramic tile and threshold surfaces in accordance with TTMAC

Maintenance Guide.

.2 Polish floor and wall tile after grout has cured in accordance with TTMAC recommendation in the Maintenance Guide; do not use acid for cleaning.

.3 Apply 2 coats of sealer to unglazed floor tile in accordance with sealer manufacturer’s printed directions.

.4 Re-point joints after cleaning as required to eliminate imperfections, then re-clean as necessary. Avoid scratching tile surfaces.

3.7 JOINT BACKING AND TILE SEALANT .1 Install joint backing under sealant as necessary.

.2 Install tile sealant around piping and fittings extending through tiled surfaces.

.3 Seal tile control joints.

.4 Seal internal tile to tile junctions. Tool to a smooth, flush surface, free from air bubbles and contamination.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 09 30 00 Toronto, ON. TILING AND CLEANING SBA Project No. A18010 Page 5 3.8 CONTAMINATION

.1 Prevent traffic over tiled areas, and protect tiled assemblies from weather, freezing, and water immersion, for 72 hours minimum, after final installation.

.2 Prevent direct impact, vibration and heavy hammering on adjacent and opposite walls for 24 hours minimum, after final installation.

.3 Cover work temporarily with building paper properly lapped and taped at joints until work has been approved by Consultant.

3.9 SCHEDULE .1 Refer to Dwg. A700.

END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 09 65 10 Toronto, ON. RESILIENT FLOORING SBA Project No. A18010 Page 1

PART 1 General


.1 Resilient tile flooring.

.2 Resilient base.

.3 Resilient stair nosings, treads and landings.


.1 Section 09 91 00: Paint and Coating

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

.2 ASTM F1066 - Vinyl Composition Floor Tile.

.3 ASTM F1861 - Resilient Wall Base.

.4 FS L-F-1641 - Floor Covering Translucent or Transparent Vinyl Surface with Backing.

.5 FS L-F-475 - Floor Covering, Vinyl Surface (Tile and Roll), with Backing.

.6 FS RR-T-650 - Treads, Metallic and Non-metallic, Non-skid.

.7 FS SS-W-40 - Wall Base: Rubber and Vinyl Plastic.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Section 01 33 00: Submission procedures.

.2 Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan.

.3 Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns and colours available.

.4 Samples: Submit two samples, illustrating colour and pattern for each floor material for each colour specified.

.5 Submit two 300 mm long samples of base and stair material for each colour specified.

.6 Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 09 65 10 Toronto, ON. RESILIENT FLOORING SBA Project No. A18010 Page 2 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Conform to applicable code for flame/smoke rating requirements.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

.1 Protect roll materials from damage.


.1 Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability.

.2 Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer three days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials.

1.8 MAINTENANCE DATA

.1 Section 01 78 00: Closeout Submittals

.2 Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.

PART 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS - TILE FLOORING

.1 Rubber Tile (FL1A): .1 Hammered. Thickness: 2mm. Size: 610 mm x 610 mm. .2 Manufacturers: Johnsonite Inc. Style: “MicroTone” .3 Colour: To be selected from manufacturer’s standard colour

2.2 MATERIALS - STAIR COVERING

.1 Stair treads with integrated nosing (FL1B): .1 Size: Full width and depth in one piece to suit existing concrete stair

treads. .2 Manufacturer: Johnsonite Inc. Style “Standard Rubber Stair Treads for

The Visually Impaired – VIRH-RD”. .3 Colour: To be selected from manufacturer’s standard colour.

.2 Stair Landings (FL1C): .1 Rubber tiles. Hammered. Thickness: 3.17 mm. Size: 610mm x 610mm. .2 Manufacturer: Johnsonite Inc. Style “MicroTone”. .3 Colour: To be selected from manufacturer’s standard colour. .4 Tactile warning tiles (TW1) at Stair 201 only. Colour to match adjacent

landing tiles.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 09 65 10 Toronto, ON. RESILIENT FLOORING SBA Project No. A18010 Page 3 2.3 MATERIALS - ATHLETIC TILE FLOORING

.1 Rubber Tile (FL2): .1 Size: Square Edge (glue down) 610 mm x 610 mm. .2 Thickness: 9.5 mm. .3 Manufacturer: Johnsonite Inc. .4 Product: Interlock Rubber Tile “Triumph”. Square Edge (glue down).

Hammered texture with speckled colour. .5 Colour: To be selected from manufacturer’s standard colour

2.4 MATERIALS - BASE

.1 Base: ASTM F1861 Type TV thermoplastic vinyl; top set coved; premoulded external corners: .1 Height: 100 mm .2 Thickness: 2 mm .3 Length: Roll. .4 Manufacturers:

.1 Johnsonite. Style: Traditional Vinyl with toe (Type TV).Tight Lock for Resilient Top Set. TDCR-XX

.2 Base Accessories: Flexible inside/ outside corners.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

.1 Subfloor Filler: type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.

.2 Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer.

.3 Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer.

.4 Thresholds strips: Refer to drawing.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verify concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content of 7percent, and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting.

.2 Verify floor and lower wall surfaces are free of substances that may impair adhesion of new adhesive and finish materials.

3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Manufacture to review preparation of substrate (concrete and stairs) prior to installation.


.2 Prepare substrates according to Johnsonite written instructions to ensure adhesion of Resilient Athletic Flooring. .1 Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and

hardeners. .2 Remove substrate paint, coatings and other substances that are

incompatible with adhesives or contain soap, wax, oil, solvents, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents

.3 Mechanically remove contamination on the substrate that may cause damage to the resilient athletic flooring material. Permanent and non-permanent markers, pens, crayons, paint, etc., must not be used to write on the back of the flooring material or used to mark the substrate as they could bleed through and stain the flooring material.

.4 Prepare substrates according to ASTM F 710 including the following: .1 For glue down tile:

.1 Moisture Testing: perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing

.2 Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Results must not exceed 5 lbs. moisture Vapour Emission Rate per 1,000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

.3 Fill cracks, holes, depressions and irregularities in the substrate with good quality Portland cement based underlayment leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

.4 Floor covering shall not be installed over expansion joints.

.5 Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. .1 Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they

will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. .2 Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products

immediately before installation.

.6 Steel Staircase surface must be mechanically abraded to assist with the adhesive bond. The staircase must be cleaned to remove all dirt, rust and other contaminants that could affect the adhesive or the bond of the flooring material to the substrate. Surface must be primed with a rust inhibitor. It is important to follow the non-porous installation instructions when installing over metal.

3.3 INSTALLATION – ATHELTIC TILE FLOORING

.1 Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for installing resilient athletic flooring.

3.4 INSTALLATION - TILE FLOORING

.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


.2 Allow all materials to acclimate to site temperature prior to their use and installation.

.3 Dry fit complicated cuts, such as all perimeter, doorways, etc. that are contained with the space. Position tiles in Ashlar pattern.

.4 Follow Manufacturer’s recommended adhesives and application.

.5 Roll floor in both direction with a 100 lbs three- section roller. Use a small hand roller in areas that cannot be reached with a large roller.

3.5 INSTALLATION - BASE

.1 Fit joints tight and vertical.

.2 Mitre internal corners. At external corners, use premoulded units. At exposed ends, use premoulded units.

.3 Install base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall and floor surfaces.

.4 Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.

3.6 INSTALLATION - STAIR COVERINGS

.1 Install stair nosing and stair treads in one piece for full width and depth of tread. Position the stair tread/ nosing on the step. There must be approximately 1/16” uniform clearance around the perimeter of the thread for expansion.

.2 Install stair skirting configured tight to stair and stringer profile.

.3 Adhere over entire surface. Fit accurately and securely. After installation is complete, firmly roll with a small hard roller.

3.7 CLEANING

.1 Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products

.2 Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: .1 Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces .2 Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. .3 Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

3.8 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

.1 Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. .1 No traffic for 24 hours after installation. .2 No heavy traffic, rolling loads, or furniture placement for 72 hours after

installation.


.2 Wait 72 hours after installation before performing initial cleaning.

.3 A regular maintenance program must be started after initial cleaning.

3.9 COLOUR SCHEDULE

.1 Colours: TBD

END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 09 91 10 Toronto, ON. PAINT AND COATINGS SBA Project No. 18010 Page 1

PART 1 General


.1 Surface preparation and field application of paints and coatings.


.1 Structural Steel Components

.2 Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrication.

.3 Section 08 11 13 – Metal Doors and Frames

.4 Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials and Applications.

.2 AWWA (American Water Works Association) - C218 - Standard for Coating the Exterior of Aboveground Steel Water Pipelines & Fittings.

.3 MPI (Master Painters Institute) - Specifications Manual.

.4 SSPC (The Society for Protective Coatings) (formerly SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel Structures Painting Manual.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

.1 Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


.2 Product Data: Submit in writing a list of all materials. Provide data on all finishing products.

.3 Samples: Submit two (2) samples, 100mm x 150mm in size illustrating range of colours and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled. .1 Each sample to be labeled with project title, finish, formula, colour name,

number, sheen and gloss value, date, name of contractor and subcontractor.

.4 Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures, substrate conditions requiring special attention and recoomended application methodology.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 09 91 10 Toronto, ON. PAINT AND COATINGS SBA Project No. 18010 Page 2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Finishing Work: Perform work to MPI requirements for premium grade.

1.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Dry film thickness for Entrance Canopy: .1 Test for film thickness over entire surface to e painted, minimum one

test/2 m2 in field areas and one test/600 mm along inside corners including at ceiling to wall juncture.

.2 If any test registers below specified thickness, reapply paint to entire surface to nearest inside and outside corners.

.3 If test registers more than 50% above specified thickness, consult with paint manufacturer, determine if problem exists, offer solutions to Consultant, and repair as directed.

.4 Re-test employing same criteria after repair.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

.1 Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three (3) years documented experience.

.2 Applicator: .1 Submit certified documentation to confirm each airless spray painter has

minimum of 5 years experience on applications of similar complexity and scope

.2 Submit certified documentation to confirm each worker has Provincial Tradesman Qualification certificate of proficiency.

.3 Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five (5) years documented experience.

.3 Reports: .1 Submit written field inspection and test report results after each

inspection. .2 Submit Field Quality Control test result reports for alkali content, substrate

moisture, and dry film thickness. .3 Submit electronic moisture meter manufacturer’s specifications including

tolerances. Submit record of latest meter calibration to meet manufacturer’s recommendations.


.1 Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for finishes.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

.1 Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.


.2 Container label to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, colour designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.

.3 Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 7 degrees Celsius and a maximum of 32 degrees Celsius, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.


.1 Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

.2 Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

.3 Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 7 degrees Celsius for interiors; 10 degrees Celsius for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

.4 Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Stains Finishes: As per Manufacturer’s written instructions.

.5 Provide lighting level of 860 lx measured mid-height at substrate surface.

1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS

.1 Section 01 78 10 – Closeout Submittals.

.2 Provide one (1) gallon of each colour, type, and surface texture to Owner.

.3 Label each container with colour, type, texture, room locations, and in addition to the manufacturer's label.

1.13 WARRANTY

.1 Provide unconditional one (1) year warranty for painting.

PART 2 Products

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

.1 Acceptable manufacturers: .1 Benjamin Moore .2 Akzo Nobel (Dulux Paints) .3 Para Painting & Coatings .4 PPG Canada Industries Limited .5 Sherwin Williams

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 09 91 10 Toronto, ON. PAINT AND COATINGS SBA Project No. 18010 Page 4 2.2 MATERIALS

.1 General .1 Only ‘top-line’ products produced by their manufacturers are acceptable. .2 Use only products of manufacture whose best quality lines meet or

exceed CGSB Specifications, except where otherwise specified by reference to another material of a specific manufacturer.

.3 Other finishing materials such as oils, shellacs, putties, thinners and other materials required for specified finishes shall be of the best quality produced or recommended by the manufacturer approved for supply of applicable finish materials.

.2 Products in accordance with the MPI Painting Specification Manual, Exterior and Interior Systems; .1 Manufacturer’s premium grade, first line Products. .2 Uniform dispersion of pigment in a homogenous mixture. .3 Ready-mixed and tinted whenever possible.

.3 Products within each MPI paint system code: From single manufacturer.

.4 Water shall be clean and potable.

.5 Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating; good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

.6 Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality.

2.3 COLOUR SCHEDULE

.1 Consultant will select choice of colours and gloss when compiling a Colour Schedule after award of Contract; allow for colour selection beyond paint manufacturer’s standard colour range.

.2 Refer to Colour Schedule for selected colour references.

.3 Conform to gloss reflectance definitions listed in MPI Specification Manual.

2.4 PAINTING AND FINISHING SCHEDULE

.1 REFER TO Table1, MPI Painting and Finishing Schedule coded systems, comply with MPI Painting Specification Manual.


Table 1: Painting and Finishing Schedule

EXTERIOR SUBSTRATES Typical substrates (including but not limited to)

MPI Manual Ref.

MPI Finish System Code

Topcoat

Structural steel and metal fabrication EXT 5.1 EXT 5.1D Alkyd

Galvanized steel HM doors and frames EXT 5.3 EXT 5.3B Alkyd

INTERIOR SUBSTRATES Typical substrates (including but not limited to)

MPI Manual Ref.

MPI Finish System Code

Topcoat

Concrete walls and ceiling INT 3.1 INT 3.1A Sealed

Concrete Floor INT 3.2 INT 3.2C Sealed or Polished

Concrete Block Masonry INT 4.2 INT 4.2A Latex

Structural steel and metal fabrications

Columns and structural rods EXT 5.1 EXT 5.1N Epoxy

Galvanized Metal HM doors and door frames, handrails INT 5.3 INT 5.3B

WB light industrial coating

Dressed lumber Doors and frames requiring apint finish INT 6.3 INT 6.3A

High Perfomance latex

Wood paneling and casework

Partitions, panels, millwork INT 6.4 INT 6.4C

Semi-transparent stain


Partitions, panels, millwork INT 6.4 INT 6.4E Polyurethane


Kitchenette cabinets, MDF INT 6.4 INT 6.4F Lacquer

Gypsum board and cement boards

Drywall, walls, ceilings INT 9.2 INT 9.2F Epoxy

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 09 91 10 Toronto, ON. PAINT AND COATINGS SBA Project No. 18010 Page 6 PART 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verify site conditions.

.2 Verify that substrate conditions are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.

.3 Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application.

.4 Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.

.5 Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: .1 Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. .2 Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. .3 Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016.

3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.

.2 Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section.

.3 Seal with shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes.

.4 Gypsum Board Surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.

.5 Galvanized steel sheet: .1 Z275 (Satin & Spangled Sheet): SSPC SP7 brush blast. .2 ZF0765 (Wiped Coat): Remove contamination, wash with Xylene solvent. .3 Touch-up damaged galvanized area with organic zinc rich primer.

.6 Structural steel and miscellaneous metal fabrications: .1 Co-ordinate the following with the responsible trades:

.1 Rust, mars, mill scale, and weld-burn tourch-ups.

.2 Oil, grease, weld flux and other residue removal. .2 Prime paint items. .3 Touch-up damaged galvanized area with organic zinc rich primer.

.7 Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats.


.8 Exterior Wood Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking compound after prime coat has been applied.

.9 Metal Doors and frames Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer.

.10 Galvanized steel sheet .1 Z275 (Satin & Spangled Sheet): SSPC SP7 brush blast. .2 ZF075 (Wiped Coat): Remove contamination, wash with Xylene solvent. .3 Touch-up damaged galvanized areas with organic zinc rich primer.

.11 Structural steel and miscellaneous metal fabrications: .1 Coordinate the following with the responsible trades:

.1 Rust, mars, mill scale, and weld-burn touch-ups.

.2 Oil, grease, weld flux and other residue removal. .2 Prime paint items, not otherwise indicated to be primed as part of another

section .3 Touch-up damaged galvanized areas with organic zinc primer.

.12 Factory primed surfaces: .1 Touch up damaged areas. .2 Clean as required for top coat.

.13 Coordinate with other trades to prevent: .1 Damage and inadvertent activation of fire and smoke detectors. .2 Odour and dust distribution by permanent HVAC systems including

fouling of ducts and filters.

.14 Field-mix Products in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

3.3 APPLICATION

.1 Apply products in accordance with MPI Painting Specification Manual. Apply each Product to manufacturer’s recommended dry film thickness.

.2 Painted surfaces to receive at minimum 1 prime coat (2 coats of prime in high traffic areas) and 2 finish coats. Coordinate with Consultant where 2 prime coats are required.

.3 Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.

.4 Apply each coat to uniform finish.

.5 Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved.

.6 Sand wood and metal lightly between coats to achieve required finish.

.7 Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. Use tack cloth just prior to applying next coat.


.8 Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.

.9 Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface.

.10 Prime concealed surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint.

.11 Prime concealed surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits.

3.4 FINISHING MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND EXPOSED STRUCTURE

.1 All existing and new duct work, piping and conduit to be painted colour to match adjacent wall/ ceiling unless otherwise required by code.

.2 Remove unfinished louvres, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately.

.3 Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, except where items are prefinished.

.4 Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas.

.5 Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment.

.6 Paint all exposed structural steel components for entrance canopy.

.7 Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing.

3.5 CLEANING

.1 Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning and Waste Processing

.2 Remove spilled or splattered finish materials from surfaces of Work performed under other Sections. Do not mar surfaces while removing.

.3 Leave storage and mixing areas clean and in same condition as equivalent spaces in Project.

.4 Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site.

END OF SECTION

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 10 28 14 Toronto, ON. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES SBA Project No. A18010 Page 1

PART 1 General


.1 Toilet and washroom accessories.

.2 Grab bars.

.3 Attachment hardware.


.1 Section 09 30 00 - Tiling

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.

.2 ASTM A123/A123M - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

.3 ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

.4 ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.

.5 ASTM A1008/A1008M - Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low Alloy and High Strength Low Alloy with Improved Formability.

.6 ASTM B456 - Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium.

.7 NEMA LD-3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Section 01300: Submission procedures.

.2 Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods.

.3 Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.


.1 Conform to ANSI A117.1 code for access for the handicapped.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 10 28 14 Toronto, ON. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES SBA Project No. A18010 Page 2 1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

.1 Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

1.7 COORDINATION

.1 Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement to receive anchor attachments.

PART 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304.

.2 Tubing: ASTM A312, Type 304.

.3 Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof.

PART 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Section 01700: Verify site conditions.

.2 Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as [indicated on shop drawings.] [instructed by the manufacturer.]

.3 Verify exact location of accessories for installation.

3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.

.2 Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.

3.3 INSTALLATION

.1 Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

.2 Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.

3.4 SCHEDULE

.1 Refer to Dwg. A201.

END OF SECTION

Electrical Specifications

for

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation 115 Parkway Forest Drive

Toronto, Ontario

HCC PROJECT #18122

HCC ENGINEERING LIMITED 40 Eglinton Avenue East

Suite 600 Toronto, Ontario

M4P 3A2 Tel: (416) 932-2423

Issued for Tender February 19, 2019

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 00 00 00 Toronto, ON TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2 SECTION TITLE SECTION NUMBER Electrical General Conditions 26 05 00 Common Work Results - Electrical 26 05 01 Wire and Box Connectors (0-1000V) 26 05 20 Wire and Cables 26 05 21 Grounding 26 05 27 Splitter, Junction Boxes, Pull Boxes and Cabinets 26 05 31 Outlet and Conduit Boxes And Fittings 26 05 32 Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings 26 05 34 Fastenings and Supports 26 05 34.01 Direct Buried Underground Cable Ducts 26 05 43 Installation of Cables in Trenches and in Ducts 26 05 44 Wiring Devices 26 27 26 Fuses - Low Voltage 26 28 13.01 Disconnect Switches - Fused and Non-Fused 26 28 23 Lighting 26 50 00 Electrical Identification 26 60 01 Testing and Commissioning of Electrical Systems 26 60 02 Access Control and CCTV System 28 13 00 Multiplex Fire Alarm System - Base Building 28 31 00.01 PANEL SCHEDULE

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 00 Toronto, ON ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 3 1.1 Project Description:

1. The project encompasses the 115 Parkway Forest Drive, Toronto facility. In general, the work shall include, without being limited to the following:

1. Provide new 347/600 Volt utility power service. 2. Provide new 120/208 Volt and 347/600 Volt EPS power service. 3. Provide communications conduit systems, grounding systems, lighting, lighting control system,

fire alarm system, security requirements, etc as shown on the drawings. 4. Provide two (2) year preventative maintenance package for each of the following items / systems:

1. Fire alarm system.

2. The existing electrical system and operations must be maintained throughout this project.

3. The electrical contractor shall provide a comprehensive Methods of Procedures (MOP’s) three weeks prior to each and every power shutdown. MOP’s must include a detailed sequence of operations to be completed during the respective shutdown as well as a back out plan. MOP’s must be approved by client and the electrical engineer prior to any work taking place.

1.2 Substantial Completion Of Contract

1. All the equipment and wire must be cleaned and tested, before acceptance by the consultant.

2. This Contractor shall guarantee all equipment and work furnished under this Division for a period of two (2) years or such longer periods as may be provided in the warranty of the manufacturer of individual components, whichever is longer from the date of final acceptance by the Engineer. This contractor shall correct all defects developing as a whole or in part, due to defective workmanship, materials or defective arrangement of the various parts or materials damaged as a result of these defects or repairs. All defects shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer at this Contractor's expense.

3. Replace, at no cost, all incandescent lamps burned out during a 30 (thirty) day period, all burned-out

fluorescent and HID lamps for a period of 90 (ninety) days and all burned out LEDs based on a 70% lumen maintenance within a 5 year warranty period after date of issuance of certificate of Substantial Performance for the contract of this building.

4. Additional requirements as detailed in Section 26 05 00, paragraph 1.7, sentence 9.

1.3 Examination of Premises and Work 1. Visit and examine the site where the work is to be done. Become familiar with all features and

characteristics of the site and/or any existing structure before submitting a bid. No allowances will be made by the Owner for any difficulties encountered by this Contractor due to any peculiarities of the site, surrounding public or private property that existed when the Tender was submitted.

2. This Contractor shall examine the structural, mechanical, architectural, electrical and any other drawings

issued to satisfy himself that the work can be satisfactorily carried out. Before commencing work or prefabrication, examine the work of other trades and report at once any defect or interference affecting the work of the electrical trade.

3. Where variances occur between the drawings and the specifications, or within either document itself, the

item or arrangement of better quality, greater quantity or higher cost shall be included in the contract sum. The Engineer will decide on the item and manner in which the work shall be installed.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 00 Toronto, ON ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 4 4. All bidders shall familiarize themselves with and adhere to the design builder’s / property manager’s

building standards and guidelines. 1.4 Terms And Conditions 1. DEFINITIONS

1. The term Owner shall be understood to refer to City of Toronto.

2. The term consultant shall be understood to refer to Howard Cohen, P. Eng., RCDD/LAN, MBA.

3. The term project manager shall be understood to refer to City of Toronto. 4. The term electrical contractor shall be understood to refer to the successful bidder to this

specification for the electrical systems. 5. The term Contract shall be understood to refer to all items and conditions of this specification,

Drawings, the complete tender package, the Contractor’s tender submission and any other future contractual arrangements. All such items and conditions shall be binding unless agreed otherwise by the Contractor, Consultant and Owner.

6. The term Project shall be understood to refer to the complete supply and installation of the

Electrical System and components, as defined in this specification and Drawings. 7. Wherever the words “equal”, “equivalent”, “approved”, or “approved equal” are used, it shall be

understood to mean, “equal”, “equivalent”, “approved”, or “approved equal” in the opinion of the Consultant only.

8. Wherever the words “install”, “provide”, or “supply and install”, are used it shall be understood to

mean “provide and install, inclusive of all labour, materials, installation, testing, and connections” for the item to which referred.

9. “Concealed” is defined as “out of sight” in “normal” viewing conditions, and includes buried in

concrete, above acoustic tile or gypsum board ceilings, within masonry or gypsum board constructed walls, within cable trays of below raised access floors.

2. These specifications or the drawings shall not be used alone. Any item or subject omitted from one, but

mentioned or reasonably implied in the other, shall be provided. Misinterpretation of any requirements of either the specification or drawings shall not result in any additional charge after submission of Tender. This Contractor shall, by careful study of the total requirements, include all necessary components to make each system workable. The consultant shall be contacted for written clarification on any point before the submission of Tenders.

3. All terms and conditions of the specifications, tender documents and accompanying Drawings shall be

strictly adhered to by the Contractor, unless otherwise noted. Any inability to comply with these requirements must be stated in writing, in detail, with the response submission. Otherwise, it shall be understood that the Contractor is bound to compliance with the stated

terms and conditions. 4. The Contractor shall co-operate fully with the Owner, Consultant, landlord and landlord’s agent and all

contractors, sub-contractors and other persons working on the site.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 00 Toronto, ON ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 5 5. The Contractor shall do the complete installation in accordance with the latest editions of the Building

Code, Electrical Safety Code, C.S.A., or other Codes or governing authorities of competent jurisdiction. In case of discrepancies with this or the manufacturer’s specifications, the Contractor shall notify the Consultant immediately.

6. Obtain and pay for permits (note: Building Permit obtained by owner) and inspections required for work

performed including all required ESA submissions and applications. Provide Certificate (s) of Acceptance from the Authorities Inspection Department, upon completion of work.

7. Submit required Documents and shop drawings to authorities having jurisdiction in order to obtain approval for the Work. Copies of Contract Drawings and Specifications may be used for this purpose. Prepare any additional information, details and drawings which these authorities may require.

8. The Contractor must comply with all requirements of the Occupational Health & Safety Act.

9. In order to meet the requirements of substantial completion the electrical contractor must complete the following:

1. Installation and successful testing of all electrical system devices as per mutually agreed to tests and commissioning plan.

2. Submission of all coordination and permit documentation for the Consultant’s review. 3. Submission of all record and As-built documentation. 4. Correction of any deficiencies in the electrical system.

1.5 Schedule

1. All work including testing and commissioning of the `Utility` and ‘EPS’ electrical systems must be completed as per the schedule provided by the project manager. Refer to schedule provided by the project manager for additional details. Include for all necessary overtime required to carry out the project. The successful contractor will not be permitted claims as a consequence of this requirement. The successful contractor to submit a full construction schedule before starting any work.

2. Sufficient manpower, materials, equipment, appliances and services are to be kept on site at all times to

maintain the scheduled completion of work. 3. All work required to be done after office hours and weekends (including x-raying, core drilling and power

shutdowns), shall be included in the tender price. Note: All x-raying and core drilling shall be provided by the electrical contractor.

4. Work associated with power shutdowns and with testing and commissioning of electrical systems must be

carried out between Sunday @12:01am and 4:00am. All shut downs must be approved by Owner. 1.6 Contract Drawings 1. The Drawings for the electrical system work are diagrammatic performance Drawings, intended to convey

the scope of work and indicate the approximate sizes and locations of equipment and outlets. The Drawings do not intend to show Designer’s Architectural, Mechanical or Structural details.

2. Do not scale or measure Drawings, but obtain information regarding accurate dimensions, from the

dimensions shown or by site measurements. Follow the Drawings for laying out the work. 3. Make, at no additional cost, any changes or additions to materials and equipment necessary to accommodate

Structural conditions (offsets around beams, columns, etc.). 4. Alter at no additional cost, the location of materials and/or equipment as directed, provided that the changes

are made before installation, and do not necessitate additional materials.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 00 Toronto, ON ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 6 5. Change location of termination panels and devices at no extra cost providing cable length increase resulting

from relocation does not exceed 3m (10 ft.) and information is given before installation. 6. Confirm at the site, the exact location of equipment.

7. Any miscellaneous materials, hardware, devices, wiring, etc., not specifically described, but required for the installation and operation of the electrical system, shall be provided and included as part of the Bid.

1.7 Materials And Equipment 1. All materials and equipment shall be completely new and unused products of only the most recent

manufacturer model or version number, C.S.A. certified, and manufactured to the Standards specified. 2. Where there is no alternative to supplying equipment which is not C.S.A. certified, obtain special approval

from the local Inspection Department. 3. No damaged, chipped or marked equipment or materials will be accepted and must not be installed. 1.8 Substitutes 1. All tenders must be based on specified items. Substitutes will not be permitted. 1.9 Operation And Maintenance Manuals 1. Provide three (3) sets of operation and maintenance manuals for equipment and products supplied

1. Provide three (3) soft copy scanned sets of operation and maintenance manuals for equipment and products supplied. Media shall be USB sticks.

2. Include the following information in the Operation and Maintenance manuals: • Names and address of local suppliers for the items included. • Technical data, product data, supplemented by bulletins, component illustrations, exploded views,

technical descriptions of items and parts lists. Advertising or sales literature is not acceptable. • Details of design elements, construction features, component function and maintenance

requirements, to permit effective start-up, operation, maintenance, repair, modification, extension and expansion of any portion or feature of the installation.

3. Review information provided in the maintenance instructions and manuals with the Owners’ operating personnel to ensure a complete understanding of the electrical equipment and systems and their operation.

1.10 Progress Payments 1. Submit a complete breakdown of the Contract with each progress billing, indicating percentage of work

complete, in a form acceptable to the Owner/Consultant. 2. The amount of monies to be allocated for close out documents must be 3% of contract value. This does not

include monies allocated for studies, testing, measurement and verification, commissioning, etc. 1.11 Shop Drawings 1. Submitted Shop Drawings must indicate details of construction, dimensions, capacities, weights and

electrical performance and flame spread characteristics of equipment or materials, as well as specification reference Section number and project name.

2. Shop Drawings shall be provided with sufficient space on the front for all Consultant’s and Contractor’s

“review” stamps. 3 Work affected by submittal shall not proceed until review is complete.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 00 Toronto, ON ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 7 4. Review submittal prior to submission to Consultant. This review represents that necessary requirements

have been determined and verified, or will be, and that each submittal has been checked and coordinated with requirements of the work and Contract Documents and bears the Stamp of Communications Contractor.

5. Changes made to the Shop Drawings by the Consultant will not affect the Contract Price.

6. Submit Shop Drawings for all material and equipment referred to in contract document. 1.12 Field Supervision 1. Throughout the duration of the Project, a properly qualified Electrical Field Supervisor must be available at

all times. The Supervisor who starts the work must not be changed unless requested by the project manager, or written permission from the project manager is obtained.

2. In addition, provide proper office supervision of the work. The person responsible for office supervision

must visit the site as often as necessary, to ensure work is properly performed, and attend weekly site meetings when so requested.

1.13 Site Responsibilities 1. Maintain work areas to be free of construction debris and waste. The disposal of all materials shall be the

responsibility of the Contractor. 2. Make all necessary arrangements to transport materials and equipment to and within the site. The

Contractor shall be responsible for arranging for the use of any hoists, lifts, pulleys, winches, cranes or service elevators.

3. The Contractor is responsible for complete storage, handling, delivery, and installation of all materials used

in the performance of the work.

4. Obtain a copy of the Landlord’s leasehold design manual and ensure that all requirements are complied with.

1.14 Deliveries / Access

1. Coordinate all deliveries to site with the Building Manager. Book loading dock and service elevators 72

hours in advance. Contractor must pre-arrange all site access and authorization for all site personnel and subcontractor personnel with the Building Project Manager or his representative

1.15 Testing and Commissioning

1. Provide testing and commissioning as per Testing and Commissioning Plan to be reviewed and approved by the Consultant and Project Manager for all items and their related components.

2. Supply all required equipment maintenance and operations manuals, for owner’s staff use. 3. Provide all required software for monitoring, annunciation and control/dispatch applications

1.16 Other 1. The tender documents shall remain the property of the Project Manager. Bidders are required to return the

tender documents to the Project Manager with their bids.

2. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to perform all cutting, patching and repair related to the electrical system work.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 00 Toronto, ON ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 8

3. Work by the electrical contractor shall be protected during erection against disfigurement, contamination or

damage by mechanical abuse or harmful materials. Protective covers shall be installed where exposure to potential damage is likely. The contractor shall ensure that no eating, drinking or smoking is carried out in the finished areas. Damages resulting from a breach of these requirements shall be repaired at the cost of the electrical contractor.

4. Existing and adjacent finishes, work and structures shall be protected from damage resulting from work of

this project. 1.17 Record and As-Built Drawings 1. The Contractor shall maintain two sets of drawings on site. Clearly mark on these drawings all changes and

deviations from the contract drawings and in particular mark the actual location of all feeder conduit locations.

2. All deviations from the contract drawings shall be recorded on the "as-built" drawings, including those

changes due to Addenda, Site Instructions or Change Orders.

3. After the date of Substantial Performance, obtain from the Consultant, a set of AutoCAD Version 2017 CD of the most recent Electrical System Drawings. These Drawings shall be marked up to record clearly, neatly, accurately and promptly all locations of Electrical System deviations as a result of Change Orders, Consultant’s or Owner’s Instruction, site conditions, etc. Utilize normal recognized CAD procedures that match the original drafting methodology. Submit the revised As-Built AutoCAD CD and Drawings (three sets) with changes clearly indicated to the Consultant for review and final presentation to the Owner.

4. For the disk drawing submission described above, the contractor must carry a total cash allowance of

$750.00 to have HCC Engineering supply the AutoCAD Version 2017 floor plans denoted as ‘Issued for Tender’ on disks. Cash allowance to be included in the Quotation price.

1.18 Drawings

1. For exact details and quantities, refer to the later sections of this document and to drawing E-1.1 through E-1.6 inclusive, E-2.1, E-2.2, E-3.1, E-3.2, E-3.3, E-4.1, E-5.1, E-5.2, E-6.1, E-6.2, E-7.1 and E-7.2

denoted as ‘Issued for Tender February 19, 2019.” 1.19 Contract

1. Conform to the conditions stated in the Contract Form, Document CCDC-2. 2. A confidentiality agreement will form an integral part of the contract and will be provided to the successful contractor.

1.20 Cleaning

1. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to dispose of all waste related to this project. 2. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws. 3. On a daily basis, remove waste materials, rubbish, tools, equipment, machinery, surplus materials and clean

all sight exposed surfaces. 4. All materials must be stacked neatly and safely. 5. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible. Do not drop or throw materials

from heights. 6. Cleaning operations shall include those areas used for temporary site access or used on a temporary basis to

facilitate work. 7. The contractor will remove all garbage from site on a daily basis at his own expense. 8. Failure to provide housekeeping and/or maintain a clean work area to the satisfaction of the project manager

will result in the project manager providing the necessary housekeeping and/or maintenance service with all related costs, including mark-up’s, being charged to the electrical contractor.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 00 Toronto, ON ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 9 1.21 Demolition

1. Disconnect and remove existing conduit and wiring in partitions to be demolished and existing ‘BX’ cables, conduit and wire in ceiling where existing outlets, lighting fixtures, devices and mechanical equipment are to be removed.

2. Remove all branch circuit wiring and raceways originating from the existing receptacle panels. Wiring and raceways shall be removed back to the source panel. Circuits utilized to feed existing to remain mechanical equipment and other 120/208 volt sources to remain must be maintained.

3. Remove all existing electrical outlets and light switches as well as the associated wiring and raceways not being reused and/or not required for new layout (note: existing outlets and switches to be removed are not shown on the drawings). Provide blank coverplates at all locations where electrical and/or communications devices were removed in which partitions are not being demolished.

1.22 Digital Photos

1. Provide digital photos of all progress to date on a weekly basis. Each photo submission must be reviewed and approved by the consultant prior to continuing with the installation.

1.23 Temporary Generator Requirements

1. As part of this scope of work electrical contractor shall supply and install a temporary (ie: roll up) 100KW 347/600V/3PH/4W diesel generator c/w fuel and temporary distribution (panel boards, splitters, breakers, disconnect switches, transformers, etc) for The Fire Hall’s exclusive use to temporarily feed all existing distribution (panels, HVAC units, transformers, etc) during each and every power shutdown of the utility service and / or any distribution required to complete all scopes of work detailed in the drawings and specifications package. Diesel generator must be c/w a weatherproof sound attenuated enclosure. The acoustic performance must be 68 dBa @ 7 meters from an average perimeter around the enclosure in free field conditions.

2. Generator fuel storage must be minimum 12 hours at 100% load. Contractor to ensure contracts are in place to fill tanks every eight (8) hours while portable generator is in operation.

3. Electrical contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with providing the temporary generator including the rental of the temporary generator, providing the cables and temporary distribution to connect the generator to the client’s equipment, subsequent disconnection and removal of cables and temporary distribution, insurance costs and fuel costs.

4. Electrical contractor shall provide shore power for generator ancillaries such as block heaters, pumps, enclosure lighting, battery chargers, etc. Exact location to obtain shore power from to be coordinated on site. Base bid price shall be based on providing a subfeed breaker and 100A/208V feeder, length suitable to be pulled throughout the facility.

5. Electrical contractor shall be responsible for disconnecting and removing the temporary generator and cables and temporary distribution from site after each and every required power shutdown.

6. Temporary generator to be load bank tested on site 12 hours prior to shutdown window. Provide test documentation to owner for acceptance prior to the shutdown window.

7. All power shutdowns must be completed during maintenance windows only. If the temporary generator power is required for a period that is longer than a maintenance window, then the contractor must wait till the next maintenance window to shut down power to accommodate disconnection of temporary generator power and reconnection of permanent power supply/source.

End of Section

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 01 Toronto, ON COMMON WORK RESULT – ELECTRICAL Page 10 PART I - GENERAL 1.1 Reference:

1. This section forms part of every section of Division 16. 1.2 Access Doors:

1. Not Required. 1.3 Cleaning:

1. Clean devices and other surfaces that have been exposed to construction dust and dirt. Clean the insides and outsides of panels and other electrical equipment and completely remove all debris and tools from the project.

1.4 Codes and Standards:

1. Complete the installation of the work in accordance with latest editions of the Building Code, Electrical Safety Code, C.S.A., U.L.C., N.F.P.A, O.S.H.A. or other codes, as required.

2. Comply with Electrical Bulletins in force at time of Bid submission. While not identified and specified by number in this Division, they are to be considered as forming part of related Standards.

3. Abbreviations for electrical terms are as per C.S.A. Z85. 1.5 Finishes:

1. All shop finished metal equipment and enclosure surfaces, must be prepared by removal of rust and scale from the raw metal, degreasing, cleaning, application of rust resistance primer inside and outside, and at least two coats of finish enamel paint. Use factory standard colours unless otherwise specified. Colour reference numbers are Sico.

2. Paint exterior surfaces of indoor electrical equipment to manufacturer’s standard. 3. Clean and touch-up (to Consultant’s acceptance) surfaces of shop-finished equipment that is scratched or

marred during shipment or installation, so as to match original paint. 4. Leave with the Owner, 0.22 gal. of paint of each colour used, in the form of liquid or spray, to allow for

future touch-up of damaged areas. 1.6 Inserts, Hangers and Sleeves:

1. Provide hangers, inserts, sleeves and supports as required. 2. Inserts are to be of lead shield type. 3. Hangers must not be welded to structural steel members and burning of holes in structural steel is

prohibited. 4. Sleeves are to be of a type suitable for the application, and be sealed and made watertight. Sleeves

through concrete shall be sized for free passage of conduit, and installed flush with underside of concrete slab and extend 100mm (4”) above finished floor unless otherwise shown.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 01 Toronto, ON COMMON WORK RESULT – ELECTRICAL Page 11 1.7 Intent:

1. It is the intent of these drawings and specifications that the Contractor provide complete and operational systems as required.

2. Where differences occur, the maximum condition shall govern. 3. Any miscellaneous items, hardware, devices, wiring, etc., not specifically described, but required for the

operation of the system, must be provided and included as part of the Bid. 1.8 Mounting Heights:

1. Mounting height of equipment is from finished floor to center line of equipment unless specified or indicated otherwise.

2. If mounting height of equipment is not indicated, verify with Consultant before proceeding with installation.

1.9 Owners Instruction and Trial Usage:

1. Instruct the Owner’s operating personnel in the startup, operation, care and maintenance of all the equipment. All equipment to be tested, operational and commissioned before instruction. Provide sheets for signatures of Owner’s representative and operating personnel present at each instruction period.

2. Arrange and pay for the service of the manufacturer’s factory service Engineer/Technician to supervise the start-up of his equipment installation, and to check, adjust, balance and calibrate components.

3. Provide these services for such period, and for as many visits as necessary to ensure that the Owner’s operating personnel are conversant with all aspects of its care and operation.

4. When commissioning is included in the contract:

1. Prior to any instruction sessions, commissioning coordinator shall submit check lists of each system or equipment indicating their operation status for acceptance by the Owner.

2. Coordinate all instruction sessions to suit Owner’s operation personnel schedule. Submit proposed instruction session schedule c/w training agenda three weeks prior to session start date to Owner for review.

5. The Owner’s operating personnel must be permitted to operate the systems under the contractor’s

supervision for a reasonable period of time prior to Substantial Completion of Contract. This use shall not be misconstrued as acceptance of the equipment.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 01 Toronto, ON COMMON WORK RESULT – ELECTRICAL Page 12 1.10 Plywood Backboard:

1. Supply and install all plywood backboards required for the work of this Division. Plywood to be highest quality fire retardant fir. 1200 mm wide x 2400 mm high (4’-0” wide x 8’-0” high), 19mm (3/4”) thick unless otherwise specified. Prime and paint backboards on both sides with fire retardant paint, equal to CGSB spec. #1-GP-151M, of a colour to match the equipment and services mounted thereon as defined in “Finishes” above. Do not paint over fire rated stamps.

2. Plywood backboards are to be provided for mounting the following surface wall mounted equipment: − Cabinets. − Contactors. − Control Panels − Disconnect Switches. − Junction Boxes 600mm (2 ft.) square and larger. − Pull Boxes. − Panel Boards. − Splitters − Transient Voltage Surge Suppression Units. − External Breakers

3. Where practical, group devices on a common backboard. 1.11 Protection:

1. Protect exposed live equipment during construction for personnel safety. 2. Shield and mark live parts “LIVE 600 VOLTS”, or with appropriate voltage in English.

1.12 Sealing:

1. Where cables or conduits pass through non fire-rated floors, walls or roof, provide internal and external sealing thereto.

2. Retain the service of a specialty sealant contractor for the work required. 3. Comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions for all sealant applications. 4. For non-fire rated locations, Sealant shall be silicone, that meets requirements of CGSB 19-GP-23, for

the size of the joint required, and the types of materials being bonded. 5. For fire rated locations, the fire stop shall meet the requirements of ULC with regards to the type of

assembly and the fire separation. 6. Provide architecturally approved air barrier seals and vapor barrier seals to electrical items passing

through or terminating within walls, roofs and decks, humidity controlled areas and pressurized areas. 1.13 Sprinkler Proofing:

1. All areas of this building are protected by a wet sprinkler system. All electrical equipment to be configured for installation in such an environment.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 01 Toronto, ON COMMON WORK RESULT – ELECTRICAL Page 13 1.14 Warning Signs:

1. Provide warning signs, as specified to meet requirements of Ministry of Labour Safety Inspection, Inspection Department, Authorities having jurisdiction and Consultant.

2. Use decal signs, in English minimum as required by Authorities. 1.15 Wire Pulling Lubricant:

1. Lubricant to be non-corrosive and CSA approved for the type of cable used. 2. Lubricants to be soap or wax based, depending upon application. Use soap based for short runs and for

semi-conducting insulated wires, and wax based for long runs. End of Section

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 20 Toronto, ON WIRE AND BOX CONNECTORS (0-1000V) Page 14 PART I - GENERAL 1.1 Work Included:

1. Provide all wire and box connectors required for a complete electrical system installation. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials:

1. Pressure type wire connectors are to be manufactured to CSA C22.2 No.65. Clamps and connectors are to be manufactured to CSA C22.2 No. 18.

2. Building Wire Connectors shall be:

1. For wire sizes up to #6 AWG - Ideal “Wing Nut” or Gardner - Bender “Wing Gard”. 2. For Wire Sizes #4 AWG and larger:

− End to end splices - Burndy YS. − Parallel splices - Burndy UC. − At studs and bus bars - Burndy QQA (CU / AL). − Two or three conductors in parallel - Burndy Q2A or Q3Q (CU / AL).

3. Cable connectors shall be:

1. For armored TECK cables, watertight type, with open compounded head - T&B series

“Spin-on 2” with corrosion resistant boot. 2. For armored cables steel type with nylon insulated throat - T&B “TITE-Bite”. 3. Clamps or connectors for armored cable, flexible conduit, non-metallic sheathed cable

shall be as required. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation:

1. Remove insulation carefully from ends of conductors and:

1. Install connectors and tighten as recommended by manufacturer. Installation shall meet secureness tests in accordance with CSA C22.2 No.65.

Install bushing stud connectors in accordance with EEMAC 1Y-2. End of Section

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 21 Toronto, ON WIRE AND CABLES Page 15 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Work Included:

1. Provide building wire as detailed below and as required for a complete electrical installation. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials

1. Wire in Conduit:

1. Conductor material to be annealed commercial grade, copper, 98 percent conductivity, up to #10 AWG solid, with RW90 insulation, #8 and larger, stranded, with RW90 insulation, unless noted otherwise, 300V rating for fire alarm, security and other low voltage circuits, 600V rating for 120 / 208V circuits, 1000V rating for 230 / 400V circuits, 1000V rating for 277 / 480V circuits, 1000V rating for 347 / 600V circuits.

2. Colour Coding (must be approved by ESA Field Inspector):

1. Two conductor, 1 phase: 1 black, 1 white

Three conductor, 1 phase: 1 red, 1 black, 1 white Three conductor, 3 phase: 1 red, 1 black, 1 blue Four conductor, 3 phase: 1 red, 1 black, 1 blue, 1 white

3. Ground wires: green.

3. Low voltage Armored Cables Type AC-90:

1. Type to be AC-90, Multi-conductor, with solid, annealed commercial grade 98 percent conductivity tinned copper conductors and cross-linked polyethylene with R90 insulation, 600 volt rating, on #10 and #12 size only.

2. Colour Coding:

Two conductor, 1 phase: 1 black, 1 white Three conductor, 1 phase: 1 black, 1 red, 1 white

3. Grounding to be uninsulated, solid copper, with impregnated paper separator. 4. Low voltage Armored Cables - TECK:

1. Type to be TECK, single conductor with annealed. Class B, stranded copper

conductors and cross linked polyethylene, RW90 insulation, 1000 volt rating for #8 AWG and larger.

2. Grounding to be uninsulated tinned stranded copper, with non-hygroscopic filter

material to maintain circular cross-section.

3. The inner and outer jackets to be PVC “Flamenol” suitable for –40°C, with mylar tape separator and aluminum strip, armour helically wound and interlocked.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 21 Toronto, ON WIRE AND CABLES Page 16

5. Two Hour Fire Rated Cable - Mineral Insulated 1. Mineral Insulated Cables:

1. Mineral insulated cables shall be manufactured to CSA C22.2 No. 124. 2. Conductors are to be solid, bare, soft annealed copper, sized as required. 3. Insulation to be compressed powdered magnesium oxide, to form compact

homogeneous mass throughout entire length of cable. 4. Overall covering to be annealed seamless copper sheath, type LW MI, rated

600 volt, 250°C.

PART III - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation:

1. General:

1. Wire shall be installed in conduit, and sized for the connected load (s) and protection as required, unless otherwise specified.

2. All single neutrals ran with Phase ‘A’,’ B’,’ C’ conductors to be minimum #10 AWG. #12 AWG neutrals may be used when run from final junction box to wiring devices.

3. Minimum power conductor wire size shall be #12 AWG, unless otherwise stated. Home runs in excess of 25 m (75 ft.) for circuits protected by a 15A over current device, shall be #10 AWG.

4. The current carrying capacity of the feeders, subfeeders and branch circuit conductors shall be sized to equal or better than shown on the drawings. If wire or cable sizes with equivalent current carrying capacity other than that specified is used, ensure that the voltage drop shall not be more than 2%.

5. The number of wires indicated for various systems is intended to show the general scheme only. The required number and type of wires shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s diagrams and with the requirements of the installation.

2. Wire in Conduit:

1. Provide pigtails at all outlets for wiring devices. All neutrals and branch circuits shall be

connected in each outlet box to avoid a break in the neutral or the circuit wire when fixture or wiring device is disconnected.

2. At each junction, pull and outlet box make a 360° loop of the stripped uncut ground conductor under the ground screws.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 21 Toronto, ON WIRE AND CABLES Page 17

3. Low Voltage Armored Cables - (Feeders):

1. Do not directly bury in or below concrete slabs or walls. 2. Do not encircle single conductor cable with ferrous metal. 3. No splices will be permitted. 4. Single conductors of the three or four wire circuit shall be run with uniform spacing of not

less than one cable diameter throughout the feeder length. 5. Use wood throated cable clamps to ensure proper and uniform cable spacing. 6. Where cables are installed on walls, provide mechanical protection over them up to 2.4m

(8 ft.) above finished floor, using a 12 gauge U section aluminum cover. 7. Cable connections to all enclosures, boxes and panels shall be by means of a watertight

malleable aluminum connector.

4. Mineral Insulated Cable:

1. Run cable exposed as required, securely supported by straps.

2. Make cable terminations by using factory made kits. 3. Use thermoplastic sleeving over bare conductors at cable terminations. 4. Do not splice cable. 5. MI cables must be rigidly supported at maximum spacing of 1m (3 ft). Do not use

aluminum products for support.

6. MI cables shall be used for emergency system feeders and branch circuits requiring a one (1) hour fire rating.

End of Section

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 27 Toronto, ON GROUNDING Page 18 PART I - GENERAL 1.1 Work Included:

1. Provide all grounding to conform with the Canadian Electrical Code and the latest instructions of the Inspection Authority, with any further requirements as noted herein.

PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials:

1. All grounding conductors stranded copper, bare or insulated as indicated on Drawings or in Specifications.

2. All ground wires are to be FT-4 rated factory green. Green tape, spray paint or any other means to alter the colour of the conductor is not permitted.

3. Use Cadweld or Burndy Thermoweld process for all weld connections. AMP of Canada Ltd. Wrench-Lok grounding connectors are an acceptable equivalent to welded connections.

4. All ground connectors to be designed and approved for grounding purposes. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation:

1. Ground all conduit, and all non-current carrying metal parts, equipment cases, frames, bases, brackets, etc.

2. Grounding of all trays, AFCR’s, racks, cabinets, etc. provided by the electrical contractor.

3. Ground each piece of fixed equipment back to the panel feeding that equipment, by one of the following methods:

1. Conduit shall not be utilized for the ground return conductor. 2. Where the conduit is flexible, install a separate bare soft drawn copper ground inside the conduit.

At the switchboard or distribution panel, provide a grounding bushing, loop the ground conductor through the bushing, and connect to the switchboard ground bus. At the fixed equipment, connect to an internal ground bus, or connect to the inside of the metal enclosure utilizing approved screws and connectors (remove all paint).

3. Run a separate (dedicated) insulated ground wire in all conduits to all devices and fixtures. 4. Where equipment is fed by a multi-conductor power cable, provide a ground conductor in the

cable. At the switchboard or panel, connect to the ground bus. Use a grounding connector on the cable for positive grounding of the metallic sheath. Loop the ground wire to the grounding connector.

5. Run a separate ground wire in all flexible conduits. Connect each end to ground bus or lug or connector.

6. Where mechanical protection is required for insulated grounding conductors install in rigid conduit.

7. Provide weld connection or wrench type grounding connectors for: All connections between grounding conductors. All connections to building steel. All connections between grounding conductors and cable lugs.

8. Arrange grounding to provide the minimum impedance paths for ground fault currents. Provide any additional grounding required for approval by the inspecting authorities.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 27 Toronto, ON GROUNDING Page 19

3.2 Equipment Grounding

1. Install grounding connections to typical equipment including non-current carrying metal parts of transformers, generators, motors, circuit breakers, cable sheaths, raceways, pipe work, screen guards, switchboards, meter and relay cases, any exposed building metal and building structural steel.

End of Section

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 31 Toronto, ON SPLITTERS, JUNCTION BOXES, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS Page 20 PART I - GENERAL 1.1 Work Included:

1. Provide splitters, junction boxes, pull boxes and cabinets as shown on the drawings and as required for a complete electrical installation.

PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 Splitter Troughs:

1. Splitter trough construction is to be based on CSA C22.2 No. 76. 2. They shall have sheet steel enclosure, with welded corners and formed hinged cover suitable for locking

in closed position. 3. Connection bars are to match required size and number of incoming and outgoing conductors as

indicated. 4. Provide at least three spare terminals on each set of lugs in splitter troughs less than 400A and feed

through lugs where required. 5. Provide double lugs for neutrals where required. 6. Enclosures shall be CSA/EEMAC Type 1 modified to sprinkler proof enclosure.

2.2 Junction and Pull boxes.

1. Junction and pull boxes construction is to be based on CSA C22.2 No. 40. 2. They shall be suitable for surface mounting and be of welded steel construction with screw-on flat

covers. 3. For flush-mounted pull and junction boxes, provide covers with 25 mm (1”) minimum extension all

around. 2.3 General Cabinets:

1. Type D or E to be sheet steel, for surface mounting, complete with screw on cover (D) or hinged door (E), and return flange overlapping sides, handle and catch.

PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 Splitter Installation:

1. Install splitter troughs where required. Mount plumb, true and square to the building lines. 2. Extend splitters for full length of equipment arrangement except where indicated otherwise. 3. Provide water tight connections for all services entering the top of the splitter trough.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 31 Toronto, ON SPLITTERS, JUNCTION BOXES, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS Page 21 3.2 Junction, Pull Boxes and Cabinet installation:

1. Install junction, pull boxes and cabinets in inconspicuous but accessible locations. 2. Only certain junction and pull boxes are indicated. Provide pull boxes so as not to exceed 30 m (100 ft)

of conduit run between boxes, and after every 2 (two) 90° bends. 3.3 Identification:

1. Install nameplates. End of Section

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 32 Toronto, ON OUTLET AND CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS Page 22 PART I - GENERAL 1.1 Work Included:

1. Provide outlet and conduit boxes and fittings as required for a complete electrical system installation. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 Outlet and Conduit boxes - General

1. The construction of outlet boxes, conduit boxes and fittings is to be based on CSA C22.2 No.18. 2. Boxes shall be suitable for the utilization voltage. 3. Combination boxes shall have barriers where outlets for more than one system are grouped. 4. Recessed 100 mm (4”) square or larger outlet boxes shall be complete with single or ganged plaster

rings to suit application. 2.2 Sheet Steel Outlet boxes:

1. Electro-galvanized steel single and multi-gang device boxes for flush installation, shall be minimum size 75 mm x 50 mm x 37 mm (3” x 2” x 1-1/2”) unless otherwise specified or required. 100 mm (4”) square outlet boxes shall be used when more than one conduit enters one side, with extension and plaster rings as required.

2. Boxes for door switches and push buttons shall be sized as required. 3. Utility boxes for connection to surface mounted EMT conduit, shall be minimum 100 x 54 x 48 mm (4"

x 2-1/8” x 1-7/8”) size. 4. Square or octagonal outlet boxes for lighting fixture outlets, shall be minimum 100 mm (4”) size. 5. Square outlet boxes with extension and plaster rings for flush mounting devices in finished plaster or tile

walls, shall be minimum 100 mm (4”) size. 2.3 Masonry Boxes:

1. Electro-galvanized steel masonry single and multi-gang MBD boxes shall be used for flush mounted devices in exposed block walls.

2.4 Concrete boxes:

1. Electro-galvanized sheet steel concrete boxes shall be used for flush mounting in concrete, with matching extension and plaster rings as required.

2.5 Conduit Boxes: 1. Cast FS or FD feraloy boxes with factory-threaded hubs and mounting feet shall be used for outlets

connected to surface mounted rigid conduit.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 32 Toronto, ON OUTLET AND CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS Page 23 2.6 PVC Boxes:

1. F series and octagon boxes shall be moulded type, with fastening ears and screwed secured covers as required.

2.7 Fittings - General:

2. Bushing and connectors shall be with nylon insulated throats. 3. Provide knock-out fillers to prevent entry of foreign materials. 4. Use conduit outlet bodies for conduit up to and including 32 mm (1-1/4”) and pull boxes for larger

conduits. 5. Provide double locknuts and insulated bushings on sheet metal boxes.

PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation:

1. Support boxes independently of connecting conduits. 2. Fill boxes with paper, foam sponges or similar approved material to prevent entry of construction

material. 3. Size box wiring chambers in accordance with Electrical Safety Code. 4. Gang boxes together where wiring devices are grouped. 5. Provide matching blank cover plates for boxes without wiring devices. 6. Use combination boxes where outlets for more than one system or voltage are grouped. 7. For flush installations, mount outlets flush with finished wall using plaster rings to permit wall finish to

come within 5mm (1/4”) of opening. 8. Provide correct size of openings in boxes for conduit and armored cable connections. Reducing washers

are not allowed. End of Section

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 34 Toronto, ON CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT FITTINGS Page 24 PART I - GENERAL 1.1 Work Included:

1. Provide conduits, conduit fastenings and conduit fittings as detailed below and as required for a complete electrical installation.

PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUITS

1. Rigid and epoxy coated conduit shall be threaded, galvanized steel and shall be manufactured to C.S.A C22.2 No. 45.

2. Electrical metallic tube (EMT) conduit and couplings shall be manufactured to C.S.A. C22.2 No. 83. 3. Flexible metal conduit and liquid tight - flexible metal conduit shall be manufactured to C.S.A. C22.2

No. 56.

2.2 CONDUIT FASTENINGS

1. Conduit straps shall be steel, double hole for rigid or EMT conduit. Single hole straps are not acceptable.

2.3 CONDUIT FITTINGS

1. Fittings for conduits shall be manufactured to C.S.A. C22.2 No.18. Provide coatings as per conduit. 2. Fittings for rigid conduit shall be steel threaded type and for EMT conduit, to be steel set screw type. 3. Fittings for flexible conduit and exposed conduit outdoors to be liquid-tight type, straight or angled

threaded for rigid and compression for EMT conduit. 4. Expansion fittings for rigid or EMT conduits shall be of the watertight type, with an integral bonding

assembly, suitable for deflection in all directions. 2.4 PULLING CABLES

1. Pulling cables shall be ¼” diameter polypropylene and of a strength suitable for tension to be pulled. 2.5 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE

1. Conduits penetrating waterproof membranes shall be PEM #6372.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 34 Toronto, ON CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT FITTINGS Page 25 PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION (GENERAL)

1. The conduits for the following circuits and systems shall be run separately:

− 120/208 volt EPS power distribution. − 347/600 volt utility power distribution. − 347/600 volt EPS power distribution. − EPS power to luminaries. − Emergency power to luminaries and exit signs. − Fire alarm system multiplex loop devices. − Fire alarm system signalling devices. − Security system devices. − Telephone and data systems. − Control wiring.

2. All conduits to be surface mounted (exposed, EMT) in mechanical and electrical service spaces and

rooms and concealed elsewhere unless otherwise shown. 3. Wiring in ceiling spaces and in all partitions shall be EMT. 4. Exposed conduits shall be installed to conserve headroom and cause minimum interference in spaces

through which they pass. 5. Use rigid conduit up to 2.4 m (8’ -0”) above finished floor where exposed indoors 6. Use RGS conduit PVC coated galvanized rigid steel Robroy Permacote in all outdoor locations

and in areas that are not environmentally controlled. 7. Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT) above grade, and above 2.4 m (8’-0”) above finished floor where

exposed indoors. 8. Use flexible liquid tight metal conduit for connection to motors, and transformers. 9. Bend conduit without heating. Replace conduit if kinked or flattened more than 1/10th of its original

diameter. 10. Mechanically bend conduit over 20mm (3/4”) diameter. 11. Field threads on rigid conduit must be of sufficient length to draw conduits tight. 12. Install pulling cables in all conduits that are to remain “empty”. 13. A maximum of 2 (two), 90° bends, or equivalent up to 180°, will be permitted without installation of a

pull box. Radius of bends must be no less than 10 (ten) times the conduit diameter. 14. Conduits must be dry, before installing wires. 15. Support all branch conduits from building structure. Do not clip conduits to ceiling hangers, sprinkler

pipes, plumbing or BAS wiring hangers. 3.2 SURFACE CONDUITS

1. Surface conduits shall be run parallel or perpendicular to building lines. 2. Conduits located near any heat producing equipment shall have 1500 mm (5 ft.) clearance. 3. Conduits adjacent to structural steel, beams or columns shall be run within the flanged portion, unless

otherwise shown. 4. Group exposed conduits on surface or suspended channels. 5. Do not pass conduits through structural members except where indicated and approved by landlord. 6. Do not locate conduits less than 75 mm (3”) parallel to steam or hot water lines. Provide a minimum

clearance of 25 mm (1”) at crossovers.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 34 Toronto, ON CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT FITTINGS Page 26 3.3 CONDUIT SIZE

1. The minimum conduit size shall be 19 mm (3/4”). 2. All undimensioned conduits in the drawings are 19 mm (3/4”).

3.4 EXPANSION FITTINGS

1. Conduit expansion fittings shall be provided on all conduits crossing expansion joints, and at maximum of 60 m (200 ft.) spacing.

2. Install expansion fittings perpendicular to expansion joint. 3. Refer to structural drawings for location of expansion joints.

End of Section

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 34.01 Toronto, ON FASTENINGS AND SUPPORTS Page 27 PART I - GENERAL 1.1 Work Included:

1. Provide fastenings and supports as required for a complete electrical system installation. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 Support Channels:

1. U shape pre-galvanized steel, size 41 mm x 41 mm x 22 mm (1-5/8” x 1-5/8” x 7/8”), for surface mounting, suspending, or inserting into poured concrete walls and ceilings as required.

2. All channel fittings to suit channel type. 3. All other fittings to suit equipment weight, location and surface as required.


1. Secure plywood backboards, channels, luminaires, equipment and fittings to wood with wood screws, to solid masonry, tile and plaster surfaces with lead anchors, to poured concrete with self-drilling expandable inserts, and to hollow masonry walls with toggle bolts.

2. All ceiling mounted equipment shall be independently supported from the structure. Do not support equipment from ceiling support system.

3. Support equipment, conduit or cable using clips, spring loaded bolts, or cable clamps designed as accessories to basic channel members.

4. Fasten exposed conduit or cables to building using:

1. One-hole steel straps to secure surface conduits and cables 50 mm (2”) and smaller. 2. Two-hole steel straps for conduits and cables larger than 50 mm (2”). 3. Beam clamps to secure conduit to exposed steel work.

5. For suspended support system:

1. Support individual cable or conduit runs with 6 mm (1/4”) diameter threaded rods and

spring clips. 2. Support two or more cables or conduits on channels support by 6 mm (1/4”) diameter

threaded rod hangers where direct fastening to building construction is impractical. 3. Support suspended luminaire using two or more lengths of Weldless “Single Jack”, bright

zinc plated steel chain, Canadian Standard #10 gauge, 13 links per foot.

6. Provide metal brackets, frames, hangers, clamps and related type of support structure where indicated or as required to support conduit and cable runs.

7. Ensure adequate support for raceways and cables dropped vertically to equipment where there is no wall support.

8. Do not use wire lashing or perforated strap to support or secure raceways or cables. 9. Do not use supports or equipment installed for other trades for conduit or cable support except with

permission and approval of Consultant. 10. Install fastenings and supports as required for each type of equipment, cable and conduits, and in

accordance with manufacturer’s installation recommendations.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 34.01 Toronto, ON FASTENINGS AND SUPPORTS Page 28 End of Section

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 43 Toronto, ON DIRECT BURIED UNDERGROUND CABLE DUCTS Page 29 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 Work Included:

1. Provide all materials and install ducts as detailed below and as required for a complete electrical installation.

PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 Ductwork

1. Rigid PVC underground power cable duct shall be manufactured to C.S.A. B196.3

2. Fibreglass reinforced epoxy cable duct shall be manufactured to C.S.A. B196.1.

3. Duct couplings, straight and angle fittings, expansion joints, plugs, caps, adaptors and solvents shall be as required to make a complete installation.

2.2 Pulling Cable

1. Pulling cables shall be 6 mm (1/4”) stranded nylon or polypropylene rope. PART III – EXECUTION 3.1 Duct Installation

1. Provide a minimum for 150 mm (6”) sand bed under ducts.

2. Lay ducts maintaining a 50 mm (2”) clearance from trench sides. Provide minimum slope of 1 to 400, towards property line, unless otherwise shown.

3. Provide expansion joints every 15 m (50 ft.).

4. Before backfilling, cap ducts and obtain approval from Consultant and local Hydro Inspection.

5. After duct installation, cover with a minimum 150 mm (6”) sand.

6. Pull through each duct, a steel mandrel not less than 300 mm (12”) long and of a diameter 6 mm (1/4”)

less than the internal diameter of the duct, followed by a stiff bristle brush to remove sand, earth and other foreign matter.

7. Install pulling cable in each duct and identify location at grade.

End of Section

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 44 Toronto, ON INSTALLATION OF CABLES IN TRENCHES AND IN DUCTS Page 30 PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 Work Included:

2. Provide duct sealing compounds and install cables as detailed below and as required for a complete electrical installation.

PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials

4. Sand for cable shall be as defined in Division 2. 2.2 Duct Sealing Compound

1. Duct sealing compound shall be a non-thermoplastic compound and shall allow for expansion and contraction of ducts and cables without loss of sealing properties.

PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 Cable Installation in Trenches

1. Provide a minimum of 150 mm (6”) sand bed under cables.

2. Lay cables maintaining a minimum 75 mm (3”) clearance from trench sides.

3. Provide offsets for thermal action and minor earth movements. Offset cables 150 mm (6”) for each 60m (250 ft.) runs, maintaining minimum cable separation and bending radius requirements.

4. Make splices and terminations in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions using approved splicing

kits.

5. Minimum permitted radius at cable bends for rubber, plastic or lead covered cables, 8 (eight) times diameter of cable: for metallic armoured cables, 12 (twelve) times diameter of cables, or in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, whichever is the least.

6. Maintain 75 mm (3”) minimum separation between cables of different circuits. Maintain 300 mm (12”)

horizontal separation between low and high voltage cables. When low voltage cables cross high voltage cables maintain 300 mm (12”) vertical separation with low voltage cables in upper position. At crossover maintain 75 mm (3”) minimum vertical separation between low voltage cables and 150 mm (6”) between high voltage cables. Maintain 300mm (12”) minimum lateral and vertical separation for fire alarm and control cables when crossing other cables, with fire alarm and control cables in upper position.

7. Install treated planks on lower cables 600 mm (2 ft.) in each direction at crossings.

8. Before backfilling, obtain approval from Consultant and local Hydro Inspection.

9. After cables installation cover cables with minimum 150 mm (6”) sand.

10. Install continuous cable protection on top of sand cover. Ensure protection extends a minimum of 50

mm (2”) beyond cables.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 05 44 Toronto, ON INSTALLATION OF CABLES IN TRENCHES AND IN DUCTS Page 31 3.2 Cable Installation in Ducts

1. Before installation of cables, pull stiff bristle brush through each duct.

2. Install cables as indicated. Do not pull spliced cables inside ducts.

3. Install multiple cables in ducts simultaneously.

4. Use lubricant to reduce pulling tension.

5. To facilitate matching of colour coded multiconductor control cables, reel off in same direction during installation.

6. After installation of cables, seal duct ends with duct sealing compound.

End of Section

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 27 26 Toronto, ON WIRING DEVICES Page 32 PART I - GENERAL

1. Provide all wiring devices indicated on drawings and described below. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 Standards:

1. Construction of manually operated general purpose AC switches is to be based on CSA C22.2 No. 111, snap switches on CSA C22.2 No.55, and receptacles, plugs and similar wiring devices on CSA C22.2 No. 42.

2. Devices shall be Specification Grade and of one manufacturer throughout 2.2 Switches:

1. Switches shall be suitable for the voltage and load controlled and shall be single pole or three way as indicated.

2. They shall have terminal holes approved for No. 10 AWG wire, silver alloy contacts, and urea or melamine moldings for parts subject to carbon tracking.

3. They shall be suitable for back and side wiring, and rated for tungsten filament and fluorescent lamps, and up to 80% of rated capacity of motor loads.

4. White ‘Decora’ style switches shall be used for 120V circuits, in all finished areas. 5. White ‘Decora’ style switches shall be used for 347V circuits in all areas.

2.3 Receptacles:

1. Duplex receptacles shall be CSA Type 5-15R, 125 volt, 15 Amp, U ground and CSA Type 5-20R (T

Slot), 125 volt, 15/20 Amp, U Ground. 2. They shall be ‘Decora’ style. 3. They shall be suitable for No. 10 AWG, back and side wiring, have break-off links for use as split

receptacles and shall have eight (8) back wired entrances, four (4) side wiring screws and double wipe contacts with riveted grounding contacts.

2.4 Coverplates:

1. Coverplates shall be white in finished areas and stainless steel in unfinished areas. 2. Use die cast aluminum coverplates for wiring devices mounted for surface mounted FS or FD boxes, and

pressed steel coverplates for utility surface boxes. 3. Use weatherproof spring-loaded, cast aluminum coverplates complete with gaskets for exterior mounted

single receptacles and switches, or where indicated. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation:

• Switches:

1. Install single throw switches with lever in “UP” position when switch closed. 2. Install switches in gang type outlet box when more than one switch is required in one location.

• Receptacles:

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 27 26 Toronto, ON WIRING DEVICES Page 33

1. Install receptacles in gang type outlet box when more than one device is required in one location.

• Coverplates:

1. Protect coverplate finish until painting and other work is finished or install after painting is complete.

2. Do not use flush type coverplates on surface mounted boxes. End of Section

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 28 13.01 Toronto, ON FUSES – LOW VOLTAGE Page 34 PART I - GENERAL 1.1 Work Included:

1. Supply and install fuses in disconnect switches, etc.. as required to complete this contract. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 Fuses - General:

1. Plug and cartridge fuses shall be manufactured to CSA C22.2 No. 59. 2. HRC fuses shall be manufactured to CSA C22.2 No. 106 and to have interrupting capability of

200,000A symmetrical. 3. Fuses shall be the product of one manufacturer. 4. Fuse type reference L1, L2, J1, R1, etc. have been adopted for use in this specification.

2.2 Fuse Types:

1. HRCI - J fuses.

1. Type J1, time delay, capable of carrying 500% of its rated current for 10 seconds minimum. 2. Type J2, fast acting.

2. HRC - L.

1. Type L1, time delay, capable of carrying 500% of its rated current for 10 seconds minimum. 2. Type L2, fast acting.

3. HRC - R fuses (For UL Class RK1 fuses, peak let-through current and I²t values not to exceed limits of

UL 198E table 10.2.)

1. Type R1, (UL Class RK1), time delay capable of carrying 500% of its rate current for 10 seconds minimum, to meet UL Class RK1 maximum let-through limits.

2. Type R2, time delay, capable of carrying 500% of its rated current for 10 seconds minimum. 3. Type R3, (UL Class RK1), fast acting Class R, to meet UL Class RK1 maximum let-through

limits. 4. HRCII - C fuses.


1. Install fuses in mounting devices immediately before energizing circuit. 2. Ensure circuit fuses fitted to physically matched mounting devices. Install Class R rejection clips for

HRCI-R fuses. 3. Ensure correct fuses fitted to assigned electrical circuit. 4. Fuses protecting motor loads and transformers to be type J1 for up to and including 600A and L1 for

ratings above 600A. 5. Fuses protecting feeder circuits to be type J2 for up to and including 600A and type L2 ratings above

600A. 6. Fuses protecting other services or equipment shall be of the type required for that purpose.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 28 13.01 Toronto, ON FUSES – LOW VOLTAGE Page 35 End of Section

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 28 23 Toronto, ON DISCONNECT SWTICHES – FUSED AND NON-FUSED Page 36 PART I - GENERAL 1.1 Work Included:

1. Provide all disconnect switches shown on the drawings and as required for motors. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 Equipment

1. Fuseholder assemblies to CSA C22.2 No. 39 2. Fusible and non-fusible disconnect switches shall be installed in CSA enclosures. 3. Provide for padlocking in “OFF” switch position by one lock. 4. Provide a mechanically interlocked door to prevent opening when handle in “ON” position. 5. Provide fuses sized as required. 6. Fuseholders in each switch shall be suitable without adapters, for type of fuse as specified. 7. Provide quick make, quick break action. 8. Provide ON-OFF switch position indication on switch enclosure cover. 9. Enclosures shall be CSA/EEMAC Type 1 modified to sprinkler proof enclosure.


1. Install disconnect switches with or without fuses as required. 2. Provide water tight connections for all services entering the top of the disconnect switches.

End of Section

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 50 00 Toronto, ON LIGHTING Page 37 PART I - GENERAL 1.1 Work Included:

1. Provide lighting fixtures as shown on the drawings and described below. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 Lamp Standards:

1. Incandescent lamps shall be manufactured to CSA C22.2 No. 84. 2. Fluorescent lamps shall be manufactured to ANSI C78. 3. Incandescent, fluorescent and HID lamps shall be of 1 (one) manufacturer, either in total, or in groups

defined by lamp type. 4. Ballast and lamps provided under this contract must be an approved combination by both respective

manufacturers.

PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 Lamp and Ballast Installation:

1. Refer to luminaire schedule and drawings, for lamp and ballast requirements. 2. Install lamps only when the luminaires are clean. 3. Ensure that lamps are suitable for luminaires before energization and lamp length and colours are that as

specified. Report any discrepancies to the consultant. 3.2 Luminaire Installation:

1. Install luminaires accurately and carefully aligned complete with all mounting hardware. Ensure any suspension rods are vertical.

2. All luminaires shall be supplied with accessory items such as yokes, plaster rings, frame adjusters, etc.., where required for proper installation.

3. At the time of date of “Substantial Completion” all luminaires, lenses, louvers and lamps must be clean and the lamps illuminated.

3.3 Luminaire Support:

1. All fluorescent fixtures must be chained by 2 points directly to main structure such that they are supported independently of the Lay-in ceiling system.

2. All fixtures in exposed ceiling areas (no T-bar or Drywall) shall be mounted on 1-5/8” unistrut, running the full length of the run of fixtures. The unistrut is to be suspended from the ceiling deck by 3/8” threaded rod from unistrut between the joists. Do not puncture ceiling deck.

3. All lighting feeds for suspended fixtures shall be dropped from the deck or slab straight down into the fixture or raceway. Fixture to fixture conduits will not be permitted. Conduit must go to the deck then to the next fixture.

3.4 Cleaning:

1. All luminaires must be cleaned before lamping and installing lenses or louvres.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 50 00 Toronto, ON LIGHTING Page 38

2. Use dry, clean, soft cloths if luminaires are dusty. Use mild solvents to clean soiled luminaires. End of Section

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 60 01 Toronto, ON ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Page 39 PART I - GENERAL 1.1 Work Included:

1. Identify electrical equipment as specified herein. 1.2 Manufacturer’s Nameplates:

1. Have the manufacturer’s nameplates affixed to each item of all equipment showing the size, name of equipment, serial number and all information usually provided, including voltage, cycle, phase, horsepower, etc.., and the name of the manufacturer and his address. Ensure that all stamped, etched or engraved lettering on plates is perfectly legible. Ensure that nameplates are not painted over. Where apparatus is to be concealed, attach the nameplate in an approved location on the equipment support or frame.

2. Ensure that panels and other apparatus which have exposed faces in finished areas do not have any visible trademarks or other identifying symbols. Mount nameplates behind doors.

PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 Lamacoid Plates:

1. As noted on drawings for normal power distribution. 2. As noted on drawings for EPS power distribution.

2.2 Conductor Markers:

1. Cable diameter less than 13 mm (1/2”) - Electrovert type Z. 2. Cable diameter 13 mm (1/2”) and larger - Electrovert #510 strap-on. 3. Colour - white with black markings except fire alarm and life safety system which shall be white with

red markings. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 Conduit Services - Power:

1. Locate identification:

− Behind each access door. − At each change of direction and at junction boxes. − At not more than 10 m (40’) apart in straight runs of conduit behind removable enclosures such as

lay-in type ceiling, but on both sides of sleeves through walls or floors. − Above each floor or platform for vertical exposed conduits, preferably 1500 m (60”) above floor

or platform. − Use stencils and stencil paint or lamacoid plates on all conduit. − Use minimum 25 mm (1”) high letters. − The identification shall describe system voltage and service, i.e., “120 / 208 volt lighting to panel

AA”.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 60 01 Toronto, ON ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Page 40 3.2 Conduits and outlet boxes:

1. Identify conduits and outlet boxes for the various systems by the use of the following distinctive colour paints. Apply a small area of paint to the inside of each outlet box, pull box and panel as it is being installed. Identify junction boxes in suspended ceiling areas with colour on both inside and outside.

2. Use the colour coding as defined in CGSB Code 24-GP-3A and CSA Standard B53. 3. Where the existing colour coding differs from these Specifications, notify the Consultant of colours used

and maintain existing colour coding. 3.3 Equipment Nameplates:

1. Identify all equipment listed below with lamacoid plates, letters 10 mm (0.4”) high, unless otherwise noted.

1. Lighting and Power Panels - Plates to be on outsides of door. Typical identification: “Lighting Panel C 120/208 v, 3 phase, 4 W MAINS 225 AMP 18KA RMS. Supplied from Panel BB”.

2. Disconnect switches and starters - Plates to be mounted externally on switch cover. Typical identification: “Fan S4, 208 v, 3 phase”.

3. Transformers - Plates to be mounted externally on case. Typical identification: “Transformer TR-UPSA 225 KVA/416/120/208 v, 3 PH / 4W fed from Panel UPS A”.

2. Secure with mechanical fastening devices except on the inside of panel doors where gluing will be

acceptable. 3.7 Wiring Colour Code:

1. Power and Lighting Conductors:

1. Phase A - Red 2. Phase B - Black 3. Phase C - Blue 4. Neutral - White 5. Ground - Green

2. For sizes available in black only, use coloured tape markers at junction boxes and terminal points to

match phase coding described above. 3. Band green isolated ground conductors with yellow tape. 4. Control conductors - Orange 5. Fire Alarm System Conductors.

1. Alarm initiating devices and manual pull stations - red and blue. 2. Alarm signaling devices - black and white.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 60 01 Toronto, ON ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Page 41 3.8 Conductor Markers:

1. For power feeders, install markers at either end of the conductors where terminated inside of equipment to match wiring diagram conductor identification or panelboard circuit numbers. Typical identification Panel AA circuits - 21; use “AA-21”. For a three phase circuit provide identification on phase A conductor only. For a single phase circuit provide identification on the phase conductor.

2. For Branch circuits supplying single phase and three phase devices such as receptacles and connections to equipment identify conductors at panel and in device outlet box. Install marker on phase conductor inside outlet box. Typical identification if device is connected to Panel B - circuit 14, marker identification “B-14”.

End of Section

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 60 02 Toronto, ON TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 42 PART I - GENERAL 1.1 Description:

1. Include in work of this section, the testing and commissioning of all new electrical and component systems.

2. Include any specific testing of equipment required by the Hydro Inspection or Supply Authorities. 3. The complete costs of the site, load bank and factory testing and commissioning witnessing of Electrical

Equipment is to be included in the Bid price. 4. Inform manufacturers of all factory and site testing requirements and include all their costs in the Bid

price. 5. At their own discretion, testing is to be witnessed by the Owner and the Electrical Consultant.

1.2 Scope:

1. Include factory testing and approved certification, where required. 2. Coordinate with the equipment manufacturer, notify the Electrical Consultant in writing, 10 (ten) days

before any factory testing to confirm Consultant’s desired presence, and be present for all site testing. 1.3 Completion of Work:

1. All electrical systems and equipment shall be totally commissioned and operating before date of “Substantial Completion”.

2. Coordinate with other trades and the building operations staff for work which affects the operation of the electrical systems, before submitting request for testing and commissioning. Failing to comply, bear all costs including Consultant’s time cost, incurred for re-testing and re-commissioning.

PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials:

1. Provide all tools, equipment, labour and materials required to perform electrical testing and commissioning as specified. Provide the test results report (s).

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 60 02 Toronto, ON TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 43 PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 General:

1. Perform site testing and commissioning only after all equipment is installed and operational. 2. Furnish manufacturer’s certificate or letter confirming that entire installation as it pertains to each

system has been installed to manufacturer’s instructions. 3. Provide 4 (four) copies of certificates of all factory and site testing in complete detail bearing in each

case, the seal of the engineer responsible for the tests. 4. Submit all test results for Consultant’s review. 5. All equipment or system deficiencies identified by factory or site testing procedures, to be corrected by

the Contractor prior to obtaining a “Certificate of Substantial Completion”. 6. Submit report, at completion of measurements, listing phase and neutral currents on panelboards, dry-

type transformers and motor control centres, operating under normal load. Include hour and date on which load was measured, and voltage at time of test.

7. General operations: energize and operate electrical circuit and item. Repair, alter, replace, test and adjust as necessary for a complete and operating electrical system.

8. Test systems and obtain written confirmation from manufacturers that components have been installed correctly and system functioning as intended. Submit certification for power distribution, communications systems and emergency power to Owner’s Consultant.

9. Provide labour, instruments, apparatus and pay expenses required for testing. Owner’s Consultant reserves right to demand proof of accuracy of instruments used.

10. Perform the following tests on completed power systems: 1. Supply voltage: measure line voltage of each phase at load terminals of main breakers and report

results in writing to Owner’s Consultant. Perform test with majority of electrical equipment in use. 2. Motor loading: measure line current of each phase of motors with motor operating under load, and

report results in writing to Owner’s Consultants. 1. Upon indications of imbalances or overloads, thoroughly examine electrical connections and

rectify defective parts or wiring. 2. If electrical connections are correct, report overloads due to defects in driven machines in

writing to Owner’s Consultant. 3. Insulation resistance tests:

1. Megger circuits, feeders and equipment up to 350V with a 500V instrument for at least one (1) minute.

2. Megger 350-600V circuits, feeders and equipment with a 1000V instrument for at least one (1) minute.

3. Check resistance to ground before energizing. 4. Coordinate and carry out motor testing at same time as driven equipment is being tested. In

addition to motor loading tests, provide labour and instruments to read and record motor load readings required to supplement tests on driven equipment through various load sequences, as required by driven equipment tests.

11. Immediately prior to occupancy, test entire electrical system by performing loss and return of utility power test. Demonstrate operation of: 1. Low voltage service equipment and metering 2. Exit and emergency lighting 3. Restabilization of systems after power return. Attach report printouts as evidence of expected

operation on systems. 4. User equipment shut-down and auto-restart.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 60 02 Toronto, ON TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 44 3.2 Field Tests

1. Provide advance notice to Owner’s Consultant of proposed testing schedule. 2. Perform tests at time of acceptance of work. 3. Conduct and pay for field tests:

1. Power distribution, including phase voltage, grounding and load balancing. 2. Circuits originating from branch distribution panels. 3. Lighting and lighting control. Motors, heaters and associated control equipment, including

sequenced operation. 4. Emergency Power Systems

4. Perform tests in presence of Owner’s Representative. 1. Provide instruments, meters, equipment and personnel required to conduct required tests. 2. Test systems to verify operation as specified.

5. Conduct di-electric tests, hi-pot tests, insulation resistance tests and ground continuity tests as required by nature of various systems and equipment

3.3 General Testing:

1. With the system completely connected, perform the following tests:

1. Control and Switching - all circuits shall be tested for the correct operation of devices, switches and controls.

2. Polarity Tests - all sockets shall be tested for correct polarity. 3. Voltage Test - a voltage test shall be made at the last outlet of each circuit. The maximum drop in

potential permitted will be 2% on 120 and 208 volt branch circuits and on 208 volt feeder circuits. Any deficiency in this respect shall be corrected.

4. Phase Balance - measure the load on each phase at each splitter, and lighting and power panelboard and report the results in writing to the Consultant. Rearrange phase connections as necessary to balance the load on each phase as instructed by the Consultant, with the re-arrangement being restricted to the exchanging of connections at the distribution points mentioned in this paragraph. After making any such changes, make available to the Consultant drawings or marked prints showing the modified connections.

5. General Operations - energize and put into operation each and every electrical circuit and item. Necessary repairs, alterations, replacements, tests and adjustments required shall be made for complete and satisfactory operating systems.

3.4 Sealing:

1. Ensure and verify that all penetrations of electrical equipment have been properly sealed with appropriate material and to the manufacturer’s requirements.

3.5 Noise and vibration:

1. Ensure and verify that all isolation equipment has been installed where required and to the manufacturers’ recommendations. Include the locations of and measurements of static deflection of spring isolators.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 60 02 Toronto, ON TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 45

3.6 Coordination Study 1. For the entire electrical distribution system provided as part of this contract and for the existing high

voltage base building switchgear and low voltage base building switchgear, supply a report from an independent test agency of the short circuit, protection, co-ordination study of the electrical distribution system. An existing coordination study is not available for contractor’s use.

Co-ordination of Protective Devices:

.1 Ensure circuit protective devices such as overcurrent trips, relays, circuit breakers and fuses are

installed to values and settings so as to provide protection by means of opening the closest device to the fault.

.2 Submit a short circuit, protection and co-ordination study as follows:

1. Obtain and organize all electrical protection data for all the equipment. This will consist of obtaining the relay types and settings, transformer impedances, cable sizes, fuse sizes and types, motor data, etc.., required to carry out the short circuit.

2. Perform a short circuit analysis to determine short circuit current levels at all critical points in the distribution system, having obtained the available short circuit current available from the Hydro Supply Authority.

3. Generate appropriate settings for all relays and protective devices from the level of the Hydro Supply Authority feeder protective devices to the largest downstream device on all the feeder secondary distribution levels.

.3 Provide a complete, comprehensive report at the conclusion of the short circuit, protection and co-

ordination study consisting of the following:

1. A set of time current curve characteristics of all protective devices in the system plotted on log/log graph paper with corresponding short circuit current levels.

2. Time current damage curves for all transformers, large motors and cables are also to be plotted.

3. Provide a complete schedule of all main protective relays, fuses and other protective device listing device locations, function number, manufacturer, model number, size, range, setting, etc.

4. The complete study will illustrate and ensure that the settings and sizes of all protective devices for each voltage level have been chosen to ensure maximum or optional protection and co-ordination during electrical fault or overload conditions.

5. These generated settings will then be applied by “in-field” testing methods to the respective devices.

3.7 Ground Fault Protection System

1. Inspect relays visually for condition and clean where necessary. 2. Check all connections for tightness. 3. Apply settings to each relay as specified in the short circuit, protection and co-ordination study and

test operation by means of a relay test set. 4. Verify each protective system by means of a primary current injection through the zero phase

sequence transformer. This will provide correct operation of both the transformer and relay as well as proper functioning of the circuitry through to the breaker tripping elements.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 26 60 02 Toronto, ON TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 46 3.8. Arc Flash Analyses

1. For the entire electrical distribution system provided as part of this contract and the existing electrical distribution system shown on the drawings, conduct an electrical arc flash hazard analysis as prescribed under NFPA 70E (CSA Z462-15) and provide a written report summarizing the findings and recommended control measures to be taken. The arc flashing analysis results must be deemed acceptable prior to the equipment purchase.

2. The power systems software utilized to perform the study must be SKM Powertools 3. Provide appropriate labels for all equipment.

3.9 Emergency Light Level Measurements 1. As part of this scope of work procure the services of a professional engineer to properly aim remote

light heads, measure and record emergency lighting levels in foot candles throughout the scope work areas with a calibrated light meter. Readings shall be taken based on a minimum of one reading for every 20’ center in open office areas, equipment rooms and corridors / hallways and one reading in each closed office, meeting room, boardroom and stairwell.

2. All light level readings are to be taken during non-daylight hours. 3. Provide a sealed letter identifying light level readings and stating that the emergency lighting levels

meet the requirements of the Ontario Building Code. Notify Owner and Consultant at least ten (10) days prior to proposed testing date and schedule testing at time and date acceptable to Owner and Consultant.

3.10 Test Results

1. Submit test results to Owner’s Consultant for review. 2. Testing methods and test results: to CSA, CEC and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Remove and replace conductors found damaged with new materials. 4. Provide required labour and tools, if during testing Owner’s Representative requests equipment be

opened and removed from their housings to examine equipment, terminations and connections. End of Section

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 28 13 00 Toronto, ON ACCESS CONTROL AND CCTV SYSTEM Page 47 PART I – GENERAL 1.1 Work Included:

1. All power and conduit work required and /or shown on drawings related to security system (ie: for electric strike hardware, maglocks, door release button, glass break detectors, etc) shall be included in the electrical contractor’s tender price. Provide all conduit and junction boxes and all necessary accessories and devices to facilitate the complete installation of the security system. Obtain exact requirements (including power requirements) from the security contractor. Installation shall be under the direct guidance of, and to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 Refer to drawings for product details. 2.2 Material Standards:

1. All equipment will be manufactured in accordance with applicable CEMA and Nema specifications, and CSA/ULC standards.

End of Section

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 28 31.00. 01 Toronto, ON MULTIPLEX FIRE ALARM SYSTEM – BASE BUILDING Page 48 PART I – GENERAL 1.1 Work Included:

1. Provide all labour, material, products, equipment and services specified, indicated or required to provide a complete operating fire alarm system. The system shall be in accordance with the Ontario Building Code (O Reg. 403/97), National Standard of Canada (CAN/ULC – S524-06-AMD1) and the Electrical Safety Code (CSA-C22.1-06).

2. Refer to drawings for fire alarm device locations, quantities and requirements. 3. Scope of work shall be carried out by qualified personnel acceptable to the authority having

jurisdiction. As a minimum, the site supervisor (foreman) as well as all field personnel installing fire alarm system devices or participating in the testing, inspection and verification process must have successfully completed the Canadian Fire Alarm Association Technology Program or have successfully completed an equivalent course, subject to the approval of the engineer.

1.2 Reference

1. Comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the following: • Ontario Building Code • CAN/ULC-S524, Installation of Fire Alarm Systems. • CAN/ULC-S525, Audible Signal Appliances for Fire Alarm. • CAN/ULC-S526, Visual Signal Appliances, Fire Alarm. • CAN/ULC-S527, Control Units. • CAN/ULC-S528, Manual Pull Stations. • CAN/ULC-S529, Smoke Detectors. • CAN/ULC-S530, Heat Actuated Fire Detectors. • CAN/ULC-S531, Smoke Alarms. • CAN/ULC-S533, Egress Door Security and Releasing Devices • CAN/ULC-S536, Inspection and Testing of Fire Alarm Systems. • CAN/ULC-S537, Verification of Fire Alarm Systems. • CAN/ULC-S541, Speakers for Fire Alarm Systems • CAN/ULC-S553, Installation for Smoke Alarms

1.3 Connections To Other Systems:

1. Motor control connections for fire alarm system shutdown of building fans 2. Magnetic door hold open devices and power supplies. 3. Security system control panel.

1.4 Existing Fire Alarm System

1. The existing fire alarm system shall remain operational at all times during construction. Ensure that the project manager and the building manager are advised of any required shutdowns at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance.

2. Make necessary arrangements for special temporary devices, equipment and/or connections required

for shutdowns described above. 3. Once the new fire alarm system is fully operational and verified, the existing system, the existing

connections to other systems, and the existing devices and the associated riser and branch wiring and raceways for all of the above, shall be removed and properly disposed of.

4. Include in the tender price to carry out all existing fire alarm system bypasses, isolations and shutdowns

required to complete this project. Notify the project manager, security and the facilities operator each day of all system bypasses, isolations and shutdowns required for the current day.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 28 31.00. 01 Toronto, ON MULTIPLEX FIRE ALARM SYSTEM – BASE BUILDING Page 49

5. Provide stainless steel blank cover plates and white fixture canopies for all wall and ceiling mounted

devices removed respectively. Fire stop all openings through fire rated enclosures left from conduits and cables removed as part of this project.

1.5 Shop Drawings

1. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 16100 for the following: 1. All devices. 2. Control panel, cabinets, processors. 3. Transponder panels 4. Batteries. 5. Annunciators. 6. Cable sample board (plywood board with full size drawing) 7. 3 x 24” lengths of two hour fire rated cables

2. Submit:

1. Description of the operational sequences of the system. 2. Submit programming schedules, arrangement and wording of fire alarm zones for system control

units and annunciators to the local fire department and if required provide all labeling changes requested.

3. Complete set of drawings, indicating location of all devices, control and annunciator panels, all interconnections to ancillary equipment, all conduit routing and sizes, all wire sizes, types, number and a riser for each control panel indicating all of the above.

4. Pictorial drawings of control equipment indicating the location of the components and parts and their respective catalogue number and electrical characteristics.

5. Internal schematic diagrams of control equipment. 6. Interconnecting diagrams and cable manual showing exact point to point connections and

identifications including junction and pull boxes. 7. System descriptions of the actual installation. 8. Battery calculations on a per power supply/charger basis. These calculations shall clearly indicated

the quantity of devices, the device part numbers, the supervisory current draw, the alarm current draw, totals for all categories, and the calculated battery requirements (which reflect a 20% DEGRADE, for 24 Hour supervisory, 30 minute alarm operation). Battery calculations shall also reflect all control panel component, remote annunciator, and auxiliary relay current draws. Failure to provide these calculations shall be grounds for the complete rejection of the submittal package.

9. Maintenance and operating instructions. 10. Proposed verification procedures and approved forms and documents to be completed. 11. Following completion of verification and acceptance by the authority having jurisdiction, submit

four (4) sets of all verification results, bound in hard cover, and titled “Verification and Certification of Fire Alarm System”.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 28 31.00. 01 Toronto, ON MULTIPLEX FIRE ALARM SYSTEM – BASE BUILDING Page 50 1.6 Maintenance

1. Provide two (2) years maintenance commencing from the date of total system substantial completion, with one inspection of the entire system per ULC Standard (M536) by the manufacturer at the end of the year. Include in the Tender Price to repair or replace all deficiencies noted during the inspection.

1.7 Certification

1. Submit letter of certification from the manufacturer indicating their technical representatives having tested, inspected and verified the system and confirm that the methods of installation, connection and operation are in accordance with drawings and specifications.

1.8 System Description

1. The fire alarm system shall be an electrically supervised, addressable, single stage, zoned, non-coded, micro-processor based, fully integrated fire alarm communication system employing multiplexing for data acquisition, distribution and control. The system shall be complete with all necessary hardware, software and memory, specifically tailored for this installation. The fire alarm system shall conform to OBC 3.2.4, “Fire Alarm and Detection Systems”, and shall include all required control and indication means. The fire alarm system shall include, but not be limited to fire alarm control panel (FACP), complete with required control and indication, remote annunciators, passive graphics, initiating devices such as manual pull stations, automatic smoke and heat detectors, signal devices such as audible and visual, auxiliary devices, initiating circuits, signal circuits and auxiliary circuits and power and circuit wiring.

2. The fire alarm system shall be an active/interrogative type system where each addressable device is repetitively scanned, causing a signal to be transmitted to the main fire alarm control panel (FACP) indicating that the device and its associated circuit wiring is functional. Loss of this signal at the main FACP shall result in a trouble indication as specified hereinafter for the particular input.

3. The system shall provide a means to recall alarms, supervisory and trouble conditions in chronological order for the purpose of recreating an event history. The system shall maintain a history file of the last 4000 events, each with a time and date stamp. History events shall include all alarms, troubles, operator actions, and programming entries. The control panels shall also maintain a 1000 event Alarm History buffer, which consists of the 1000 most recent alarm events from the 4000 event history file.

5. Fire alarm events have highest priority. Subsequent alarm events are queued in the order received and do not affect existing alarm conditions. Priority Two, Supervisory and Trouble events have second-level, and third-level priority respectively. Signals of a higher-level priority take precedence over signals of lower priority even though the lower-priority condition occurred first. Annunciate all events regardless of priority or order received.

6. An event on one zone does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other zone. All zones are manually resettable from the FACP after the initiating device or devices are restored to normal. The activation of an addressable device does not prevent the receipt of signals from subsequent addressable device activations.

7. The main CPU shall be a field re-programmable control panel with password protected software algorithms to carry out fire alarm protection functions, such as receiving signals, alarm verification, initiating alarm, sound and visual sequences, supervising the system continuously, actuating built-in and remote zone annunciators, data storage and print out and initiating trouble signals.

8. The system shall have the ability to disable and enable individual circuits for maintenance and/or testing purposes.

9. All on site programming changes to the fire alarm system shall be password protected. During the construction stage, all program and custom label changes shall be approved in writing by the Engineer.

10. All system controls shall be housed in surface wall mounted steel cabinets. 11. All network intelligence and decision making capabilities shall be distributed amongst the control panels

and transponders in a peer to peer fashion.


12. Remote smart transponders shall be configured as single stage, zoned, non-coded, indicating, standalone addressable systems complete with Local Alert and EVAC tone oscillators and amplifiers. Transponders shall be modular in design with solid state microprocessor based electronics. Each transponder’s microprocessor, memory, and associated circuitry shall have the ability to detect losses of communications circuit wiring. Transponders shall be fully sprinklerproof.

13. All control and transponder cabinets are to be properly grounded to building ground. Conduit ground will not be acceptable. The green coloured grounding loop shall be a minimum #6 AWG insulated copper run in conduit. The ground loop shall be connected to the main building electrical ground source. Ground wire must not be run in the same conduit as the fire alarm and communication wiring.

14. Communications between the CPU and the transponders shall be via a true Class ‘A’ loop, with two (2) hour fire rated MICC cable. Each channel shall operate independent of the other. Faults on one channel shall not affect the operation of the other.

15. All control cabinets are to be properly grounded to building ground. Conduit ground will not be acceptable. The green coloured grounding loop shall be a minimum #6 AWG insulated copper run in conduit. The ground loop shall be connected to the main building electrical ground source. Ground wire must not be run in the same conduit as the fire alarm and communication wiring.

16. The fire alarm system shall also include, but not be limited to the following components: • The required components to annunciate low battery voltage, generator trouble, generator running,

elevator signaling, door holder release, a signal to any and all building security and automation systems and annunciation/control points as scheduled.

• Automatic and manual alarm addressable initiating devices. • Audible signal devices (horns / speakers). • Visual signal devices. • End-of-line devices. • Remote Printer/annunciators/controls.

1.9 System Operation

1. Activation of any alarm initiating device (sprinkler flow switch, manual pull station, ceiling mounted multisensor, heat or smoke detector, duct mounted smoke detector, etc..) to initiate operations to occur as follows:

1. Alarm

1. Annunciate the Alarm Zone, in English language, at the control unit and all remote annunciators, printers and interactive computers.

2. Automatically activate all pressurization fans as shown on contract documents. 3. Log the alarm in the Historical Alarm Log File. 4. Activate the City Connect Alarm control point whenever a fire alarm condition exists.

5. Activate the automatic elevator recall system. If the alarm did not originate from the ground floor level, all identified elevators shall automatically be returned to the ground floor. If the alarm originated from the ground floor level, all elevators shall automatically be returned to the designated alternate floor. Refer to the zone schedules for interconnections required and confirm this sequence with the Consultant. Utilize dual voltage relays in red coloured junction boxes for elevator recall.

6. Elevator smoke and heat detector sequences shall comply with local, provincial and CSA B44-07 requirements for main/alternate floor recalls, and shunt trip activations.

7. Shut down ventilation fans through energizing coils in dual voltage relays to be installed in the motor branch current for each supply air and exhaust air fan. The DVR’s shall have sufficient number of contacts to wire to each fan.

8. Transmit signals and wire to building automation system, automatic magnetic door releasing system and auxiliary systems as identified in contract documents. A separate signal per smoke management zone shall be transmitted and wired to each system.

9. Activate the horn control circuits.


10. Activate strobe lights. 2. Activate “Fire Do Not Enter” Signs. 3. System Reset

1. It shall not be possible to reset the fire alarm system until all the alarm zones have been properly reset or cleared.

4. System Trouble Operation

1. A trouble initiated by the actuation of a sprinkler system supervisory trouble switch shall cause the following to occur: 1. An audible and visual trouble signal shall sound at the control panel and remote

annunciators until acknowledged by an operator. 2. Annunciate the Supervisory Trouble Alarm at the control panel and remote annunciators. 3. Print the time, date and the trouble zone on all printers. 4. Log the supervisory trouble alarm in the Historical Trouble Log File.

2. Any monitor or control point trouble, or other system trouble shall cause the following to

occur: 1. An audible and visual trouble signal shall sound at the control panel and remote

annunciators, until acknowledged by an operator. 2. Annunciate the Point Trouble Alarm at the control panel and remote annunciators. 3. Print the time, date and the system trouble on all remote printers. 4. Log the trouble condition in the Historical Trouble Log File.

1.10 Network Operation

1. Each connected local control panel, CACF panel and transponder panel shall communicate via a DCLA multiplex loop to the next panel at 57.6 Kbaud. In the event that the path to the next panel experiences a communication failure, the panel shall communicate in the other direction and report the communication failure immediately to the interactive computer and printer.

2. In the event that a group of panels become isolated from the network, that group shall form a sub-network with all remaining common interactions, monitoring and control intact.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 28 31.00. 01 Toronto, ON MULTIPLEX FIRE ALARM SYSTEM – BASE BUILDING Page 53 PART II – PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturer

1. All equipment shall be new (unless indicated otherwise), CSA approved, ULC listed and manufactured, tested, installed and verified to the following minimum standards:

1. Power supply: CAN4-S524. 2. Audible signal devices: ULC-S525. 3. Control unit: ULC-S527. 4. Manual fire alarm stations: ULC-S528. 5. Smoke detectors: ULC-S529. 6. Thermal detectors: ULC-S530. 2. All equipment used for the fire alarm system shall be designed and supplied by a single system

manufacturer. 3. Acceptable product manufacturer:

1. Chubb Edwards 2. Mircom 3. Tyco

4. The system supplied under this specification shall utilize node-to-node, direct wired, multi-priority peer-to-peer network operations. The system shall utilize electronically addressed, smoke detectors, heat detectors and input/output modules as described in this specification. The peer-to-peer network shall contain multiple nodes consisting of the command center, main controller, remote control panels, LCD/LED annunciation nodes, and workstations. Each node is an equal, active functional member of the network, which is capable of making all local decisions and generating network tasks to other nodes in the event of node failure or communications failure between nodes.

5. All integrated life safety system equipment shall be arranged and programmed to provide an integrated

system for the early detection of fire, the notification of building occupants, the automatic summoning of the local fire department, the override of the HVAC system operation, and the activation of other auxiliary systems to inhibit the spread of smoke and fire, and to facilitate the safe evacuation of building occupants. In all operating modes, the processing of fire alarms shall have the highest priority.

2.2 Central Processing Unit (CPU)

1. The system Central Processing Units (CPU’s) shall be housed in the control panel. 2. The Central Processing Units shall come complete with an operator’s interface panel containing the

following: 1. 80 Character backlit Alphanumeric LCD Display module complete with 32-character user defined

device message. 2. 10 digit alphanumeric keypad for password entry and specific menu driven operation,

programming and maintenance functions. 3. Common Alarm LED and Push-Button Acknowledge Switch 4. Common Trouble LED and Push-Button Acknowledge Switch 5. Signal Silence Switch 6. System Reset Switch 7. Power On Indicator 8. Lamp Test Switch 9. ‘Drill’ switch to sound evacuation tone throughout the without activating the city tie connections.

3. All components shall be fully operational while the system is operating on the standby batteries.


4. CPU electronics shall be microprocessor-based. Basic Life Safety Software shall be retained in erasable programmable read-only-memory, EPROM, and executed from random-access-memory, RAM, to allow password protected field editing. The CPU shall have the capacity for 2000 intelligent input devices.

5. The CPU shall be capable of loading or editing of special instructions and/or operating sequences as

required. It shall be capable of on site programming to accommodate expansion and changes. All software operations shall be stored in a non-volatile programmable memory within the fire alarm control panel. Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase the instructions stored in memory.

6. The CPU must incorporate circuitry to continuously monitor the communications and data processing

cycles of the microprocessor. On CPU failure, an audible and visual alarm shall operate to advise attending personnel.

7. The CPU shall be capable of supporting a minimum of five (5) RS-232-C I/O ports. CPU data output

to the I.O. ports shall be in a parallel ASCII format at field adjustable baud rates of 1200, 2400 and 4800.

8. Opening the cabinet door shall provide access to all operating controls. All electrical connections shall

be front accessible through the hinged door and removable dead front panel. 9. The alarm activation of any initiation circuit shall not prevent the subsequent alarm operation of any

other initiation circuit. All alarm receiving circuits shall be configured as Class DCLA wiring, current limited.

10. Horn circuits and strobe light circuits shall be independently supervised and fused such that a fault on

one circuit shall not affect the operation of any of the other circuits. All signal circuits shall be configured as follows 1. Class B wiring, current limited. 2. Rated at two amps of continuous power.

2.3 Control Panel

1. The control panel shall provide operation controls and backlit alphanumeric LCD type annunciator panel.

2. The control panel shall be enclosed in a surface wall mounted cabinet with a hinged door and clear

glass viewing window, such that all annunciator indications and operating instructions are clearly visible. The door shall be complete with a lock.

3. All controls and indicators for the system shall be provided at the control panel. Controls and

indicators for the following systems shall be provide: 1. Fire alarm annunciator/control 2. Damper monitor/control 3. Fan control 4. Magnetic hold open door control

4. Provide the following control switches and LEDs for the functions listed below. Bypasses listed below

shall cause a fire alarm system trouble signal when operated. 1. One three-position maintained switch for each fan and damper complete with two yellow and one

green status LED’s for each switch. 2. System reset switch 3. Signal silence switch 4. Audible signals bypass switch 5. Fan/damper bypass switch and LED’s.


6. Magnetic hold open door bypass switch and LED’s. 7. Spare Bypass function and LED’s. 8. Spare Bypass function and LED’s. 9. Spare Bypass function and LED’s.

5. Each addressable analog loop shall be circuited so device loading is not to exceed 70% of loop capacity

in order to allow for the addition of future devices. 6. Control panel shall house power amplifiers to suit the load required per contract documents plus an

additional spare amplifier sized to meet the requirements of the largest amplifier in the system, with automatic transfer on priority. All amplifiers and circuitry to be supervised. Amplifiers to be loaded to 60% capacity.

7. Control panel shall be capable of chronologically logging and storing 300 events in an alarm log and

300 events in a trouble log. The historical logs shall be stored in the CPU’s memory and shall be protected by a lithium battery that is supervised for a low battery condition. Each recorded event shall include the time and date of that event’s occurrence. The alarm log file must be separate from the trouble log file. It shall be possible for the user to generate a report of both logs upon request.

8. Provide dry contact auxiliary control circuits as follows: 9. DPDT fused 2 amp @ 24vdc, Form C misc. control relays. 10. Each of the following types of remote equipment associated with the fire alarm system shall be

provided with a form ‘C’ control relay contact as shown on the drawings, but shall be typically as follows: 1. Provide one (1) shutdown control relay contact for each HVAC fan system. 2. Provide one (1) shutdown control relay contact for each HVAC supply fan. 3. Provide one (1) shutdown control relay contact for each HVAC return fan.

11. Provide a dedicated 24VDC circuit to feed all auxiliary relays required for inductive loads. Circuits

shall be supervised via an end-of-line relay and addressable input module. Auxiliary relays shall not derive their power from the starter or load being controlled.

12. System expansion modules connected by ribbon cables shall be supervised for module placement.

Should a module become disconnected the system trouble indicator must illuminate and audible trouble signal must sound.

13. The control panel shall have provision for disabling and enabling all circuits individually for

maintenance or testing purposes. Capability must be password protected. 14. Silent Walktest with History Logging:

1. Each control panel shall be capable of being tested by one person. While in testing mode the alarm activation of an initiating device circuit shall be silently logged as an alarm condition in the historical data file. The panel shall automatically reset itself after logging of the alarm.

2. The momentary disconnection of an initiating or indicating device circuit shall be silently logged as a trouble condition in the historical data file. The panel shall automatically reset itself after logging of the trouble condition.

3. Should the walktest feature be on for an inappropriate amount of time it shall revert to the normal mode automatically.

4. Should an alarm condition occur from an active point, not in walktest mode, it shall perform operations described in System Operation Section.


15. All system controls shall be housed in a surface wall mounted steel cabinet. Finish shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s standards.

16. All modules shall be secured behind hinged locked doors with a full viewing tempered plastic window.

The hinged locked door shall give access to all the operating controls but shall not expose live connections.

17. All control cabinets are to be properly grounded to building ground. Conduit ground will not be

acceptable. 18. Addressable Device Network:

1. The system must provide communication with addressable initiating devices. All of these devices will be annunciated on the control panel’s main LCD display. Annunciation shall include the following conditions for each point:

1. 80 Character Zone/Device Location 2. Type of Device 3. Detector Status (Normal/Alarm/Trouble) 4. Device Missing/Failed

2. A minimum of 600 addressable devices may be multi-dropped from a single transponder. Systems that require factory reprogramming to add or delete devices are unacceptable.

3. The communication format must be a completely digital poll/response protocol. A high degree of communication reliability must be obtained by using parity data bit error checking routines for address codes and check sum routines for the data transmission portion of the protocol.

4. Each addressable device must be uniquely identified by an address code entered on each device at time of installation.

5. The system shall support 100% of addressable devices in alarm or operated at the same time, under both primary (AC) and secondary (battery) power conditions. Systems which cannot support 100% of their point capacity in alarm simultaneously cannot assure appropriate system response and are not acceptable.

6. The system shall allow a line distance of up to 2,500 feet to the furthest addressable device on a Class A communications circuit. The appropriate quantity of isolator modules shall be installed so that a wiring fault (short, open or ground) within one floor area/fire alarm zone shall not prevent the normal operation of other addressable devices on other floor areas/fire alarm zone.

7. The panel shall have an interface module for remote site monitoring. The module shall have a dialer (Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT)) module to transmit alarm, supervisory and trouble signals to a Central Monitoring Station (CMS). The DACT shall support dual telephones lines, Contact I.D. communications, and configured for dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) or pulse modes. It shall be possible to delay AC power failure reports, auto test call, and be site programmable. The dialer shall be capable of transmitting every individual alarm condition to the central station.

8. The system shall use full digital communications to supervise all addressable loop devices for placement, correct location, and operation. It shall allow swapping of “same type” devices without the need of addressing and impose the “location” parameters on replacement device. It shall initiate and maintain a trouble if a device is added to a loop and clear the trouble when the new device is mapped and defined into the system.


19. Analogue Smoke Detection System: 1. The system shall maintain the sensitivity level set, for each detector, constant over time by

automatically compensating for environmental factors such as dust and dirt accumulations in a smoke detector’s chamber. The smoke detector shall be a smoke density measuring device having no self contained set-point. The alarm decision for each detector shall be determined by the control panel.

2. The system shall automatically indicate when an individual detector needs cleaning. When a

detector’s average value reaches a predetermined value a ‘Dirty Detector’ trouble condition shall be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel for the individual detector. When ‘Dirty Detector’ trouble conditions are reported, the detector’s sensitivity level shall not be compromised by the dust and dirt accumulation in its chamber.

3. It shall be possible for the USER to obtain a report of all smoke detectors that are ‘Almost Dirty’

and will require cleaning in the near future before they initiate a ‘Dirty Detector’ trouble condition. 4. All data transmissions, including the analogue value, between the smoke detectors and the control

panel shall be digitally transmitted and incorporate parity and checksum digital data checks of each transmission. The system must verify that the proper detector type is in the base to match the desired software configuration.

5. An operator from the control panel, having a proper access level, shall have the ability to manually

access and print the following information for each detector in a report format that can be easily understood by the user: 1. Device Type and Location 2. Primary Status 3. Present Average Value 4. Present Sensitivity Selected 5. Highest Peak Detection Values 6. Detector Chamber Status (Normal, Almost Dirty, Dirty, Excessively Dirty) 7. It shall be possible to program the control panel to automatically change the sensitivity

settings of each detector based on time-of-day and day-of-week. 6. The control panel shall have the capability of programming each detector for a two-stage function.

This function allows a control function to occur when for example, a detector programmed for 3% smoke obscuration reaches the threshold of 1.5% smoke obscuration.

7. All ancillary and auxiliary devices and functions shall be supervised for shorts, opens and grounds

and shall cause a common visual and audible trouble signal at the CPU and remote annunciators. 2.4 Annunciator Panels.

1. Remote Panel 1. The annunciator panel shall be LED type, with engraved/etched designation cards (5mm minimum

sized letters) to indicate zone. Cards shall be colour coded. (Scheme to be determined during construction).

2. Provide the number of LEDs as required plus an additional 25% (over and above those shown on fire alarm system zone schedule) with the corresponding label, “spare for future use”.

3. LED’s shall be supervised, including trouble signal for lamp failure or open circuit. 4. Provide a “60 Second Delay” indicator to illuminate indicating the system is generating an

uninterruptible 60 second period of signaling throughout. 5. Annunciator panels shall be enclosed in steel cabinets suitable for semi-flush or surface mounting

as indicated on the drawings. All modules shall be secured behind hinged locked doors with a full viewing tempered plastic window.


2. Passive Custom Graphic Annunciators

1. Provide 11.0” x 17.0” generated drawings (customized graphics) of each floor showing fire alarm zoning with different colours as well as major features such as stairs, elevators and corridors.

2. Each of the above generated floor drawings are to be laminated. All drawing and cover assemblies are to be contained within a hard covered 3-ring binder chained to the wall. Provide two (2) complete sets of generated drawing packages.

3. Provide one (1) 11.0” x 17.0” generated drawing (customized graphics) for each floor showing the geographical location of the isolator modules. Drawings are to be mounted in a metal frame behind glass. Mount the drawings.

3. LCD Panel

1. The LCD remote annunciator panel shall containing the following: 1. 80 Character backlit Alphanumeric LCD Display module complete with 32-character user

defined device message. 2. 10 digit alphanumeric keypad for password entry and specific menu driven operation,

programming and maintenance functions. 3. Common Alarm LED and Push-Button Acknowledge Switch 4. Common Trouble LED and Push-Button Acknowledge Switch 5. Signal Silence Switch 6. System Reset Switch 7. Lamp Test Switch

2.5 Control Panel and Transponders

1. The control panel and transponders shall be provided with 120 VAC power via a dedicated circuit breaker complete with lockoff from emergency panels (as indicated on the drawings).

2. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure must be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel/transponder and the remote active CRT annunciator. A green ‘Power On’ LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is present.

3. Control Panel and transponder power supply shall have the following operating characteristics: 1. Rated for five amps continuous duty. 2. Sufficiently sized to power all remote system components plus adequate spare capacity to power

no less than 50% additional addressable devices. 3. 24 VDC filtered and regulated. 4. Power limited with a range of 20.4 VDC to 32 VDC. 5. Automatic ‘Brownout’ transfer to standby batteries when supply voltage drops to 102 VAC.

4. The system shall be provided with sufficient standby capacity to operate the entire system upon loss of normal 120 VAC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of twenty-four hours with two hours of alarm operation at the end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to the standby batteries upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic.

5. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition or disconnection of the batteries shall be audibly and visually annunciated at the control panel/transponder.

2.6 Alarm Initiating Devices

1. Addressable Pull Stations 1. The addressable manual pull station shall be non-coded, single-stage, single action, with additional

normally closed contact for security requirements and shall operate on any addressable detection circuit. The addressable manual fire station shall have a single addressable unit for the first stage alarm.


2. Addressable Analogue Detector Bases 1. All addressable analogue smoke, multisensor and heat detector heads shall twist lock onto their

bases. The electronics that communicate the detector’s status (analogue value) to the control panel shall be contained in the base or the head. The same base will be compatible for multisensor, smoke and thermal detectors. Upon removal of the head, a trouble signal will be transmitted to the control panel. The detector’s address will be set at the time of installation.

2. Where required by the design documents, by Code or by local by-laws, provide an additional alarm relay (Form C, SPDT), normally open contact, for auxiliary functions and wire to control point (i.e. elevator machine rooms).

3. Each detector base or head shall contain a LED that will flash each time it is scanned by the control panel (once every four seconds). When the control panel determines that a detector is in alarm that detector’s LED will turn on steady indicating the abnormal condition.

4. Each detector shall be scanned by the control panel for its type identification to prevent inadvertent substitution of another detector type. The control panel shall operate with the installed device but shall initiate a ‘Wrong Device’ trouble condition until the proper type is installed or the programmed detector type is changed.

3. Analogue Photoelectric Smoke Detector

1. The addressable smoke detector shall be of the photoelectric type and shall communicate the digital equivalent of the actual analogue smoke chamber values to the system control panel or transponder once every four seconds.

2. The sensitivity range of each photoelectric detector set in the control panel shall be from 0.5% to 3.7% smoke obscuration. Each detector shall have 7 different programmable sensitivity levels within this range (0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0 and 3.7%).

3. The detectors shall be of a low profile design and ULC Listed for both ceiling and wall mount applications.

4. Detector shall be equipped with a fine 30 mesh insect screen. 5. The detector’s electronics shall be immune from false alarms caused by EMI and RFI. All detector

heads shall be designed with voltage and RF transient suppression techniques, smoke signal verification circuits and an insect screen.

4. Analogue Ionization Smoke Detector

1. The addressable smoke detector shall be of the ionization type and shall communicate the digital equivalent of the actual analogue smoke chamber values to the system control panel or transponder once every four seconds.

2. The sensitivity range of each ionization detector set in the control panel shall be from 0.5% to 1.7% smoke obscuration. Each detector shall have 4 different programmable sensitivity levels within this range (0.5, 0.9, 1.3 and 1.7%).

3. The detectors shall incorporate a single radioactive source with an outer sampling chamber and an inner reference ionization chamber to provide stable operation under fluctuations in environmental conditions such as temperature and humidity.

4. The detectors shall be of a low profile design and ULC Listed for both ceiling and wall mount applications.

5. The detector’s electronics shall be immune from false alarms caused by EMI and RFI. All detector heads shall be designed with voltage and RF transient suppression techniques, smoke signal verification circuits and an insect screen.

5. Addressable Analogue Duct Smoke Detectors

1. Duct smoke detector assemblies shall come complete with duct housing, photoelectric smoke detector head and sampling tubes as required. The duct housing base shall come complete with an auxiliary set of form C dry contacts rated at 120 VAC, 3 Amps and terminals for a remote lamp unit.


2. The electronics that communicate the detector status (analogue value) to the control panel shall be contained in the duct housing base. Upon removal of the detector head, a trouble signal will be transmitted to the control panel. The detector’s address will be set at the time of installation.

3. The duct housing assembly shall consist of an airtight housing mounted on the side of the duct. This housing shall contain the detector base into which the photoelectric detector head is inserted.

4. The system shall automatically indicate when an individual duct detector needs cleaning. 5. It shall be possible to obtain a list of all duct smoke detectors that will require cleaning in the near

future before they initiate a ‘Dirty Detector’ trouble condition. 6. Analogue Thermal Detector

1. The analogue thermal detector shall be programmable for any one of the following functions: 1. Fixed Temperature Detector Type. 2. Rate of Rise Detector Type. 3. Rate Compensated Fixed Temperature Type.

2. The detector’s small thermal mass shall allow for an accurate up-to-date temperature reading of each detector to be logged at the control panel. It shall be possible for the heat detector to monitor and report temperatures of 32 to 128ºF without causing a fire alarm condition.

3. The rate-of-rise operation shall be selectable for either a 15ºF (8.3ºC) per minute or a 20ºF (11.1ºC) per minute rate of temperature rise.

4. The fixed temperature setting is selectable for 117ºF (47.2ºC) or 135ºF (57.2ºC) and is entirely independent of the rate-of-rise operation.

5. Both the rate-of-rise and fixed temperature operations shall be self restoring. 7. Flame Detectors

1. Flame detectors shall be of the infra-red type which is highly sensitive to all flaming fires using a pyro-electric detector. Flame detectors are to have a two level sensitivity adjustment. Flame detectors shall be weatherproof, infra-red type, suitable for Class I or II locations, with a built-in response indicator.

8. Analog Multisensor Detectors

1. The addressable multisensor detector shall contain photoelectric and heat sensing elements. 2. The detectors shall be of a low profile design and ULC Listed for both ceiling and wall mount

applications. 3. Detector shall be equipped with a fine 30 mesh insect screen. 4. The detector’s electronics shall be immune from false alarms caused by EMI and RFI. All detector

heads shall be designed with voltage and RF transient suppression techniques, smoke signal verification circuits and an insect screen.

5. Dynamic filters and algorithms shall be utilized to allow the system to distinguish between deceptive phenomenon and an actual fire. System delay time shall be a maximum of 5 seconds.

6. The sensitivity range of each multi sensor detector set in the control panel shall be 0.6% to 3.7% obscuration/foot. Each detector shall have 5 different programmable sensitivity levels within the range specified above.

9. Initiating Device Interface and Control Modules

1. Zone Addressable Modules shall be used for the monitoring of water flow, valve tamper and non-addressable devices, as well as for control of fans or dampers, beacons and other devices that require shutdown or manual control in an alarm condition.

2. Initiating device interface modules shall monitor any N/O contact device. The module will communicate the zone’s status (normal, alarm, trouble) to the transponder. The modules zone address shall be set at the time of installation.


3. Control modules shall be able to provide supervised control of any control function. The module will communicate the zone’s status (normal, trouble) to the transponder. Each control module shall provide a double pole double throw relay for switching loads of up to 120 VAC. Each common leg of the relay shall be equipped with a replaceable 2 AMP fuse. The module zone address shall be set at the time of installation.

2.7 Audible Signal Devices

1. Horns 1. In all finished areas provide a low profile horn. 2. Capable of mounting to single gang backbox. 3. Minimum of two field configurable outputs. 4. Horn housing shall be white in colour with ‘Fire’ markings. 5. Provide horn complete with ‘touch to silence’ signal silence with resound timer in all residential

(resident and guest) suites. 2.8 Visual Alarm Signal Devices

1. Strobe Lights 1. Strobe lights shall be indoor/outdoor type with red lexan lens and xenon flash tube. They shall be

connected to receive signal from transponder to flash or strobe. 2. Capable of mounting to single gang backbox. 3. Minimum of four field configurable strobe outputs, including 75 and 100 cd. 4. Strobe housing shall be white in colour with ‘Fire’ markings.

2.9 End-Of-Line Resistors

1. End-of-line resistors for signaling circuits shall be sized to ensure the correct supervisory current flows in each circuit.

2. All end-of-line resistors shall be mounted on a stainless steel plate for mounting on a standard single gang plate and bear the ULC label.

2.10 Isolator Module

1. Provide class A isolator modules for circuit isolation upon short circuit. When a short is detected, the isolator module shall isolate the affected segment of the circuit, allowing the remaining devices to continue operation. Modules shall operate within 23 milliseconds of a short circuit condition on the multiplex loop. The modules must be self-restoring automatically reconnecting to circuit segment when the fault is removed.

2.11 Ancillary Devices

1. ‘Fire Do Not Enter’ signs 1. 24 volt DC, with wording at least 200 mm high letters, visible only when illuminated during actual

fire condition, with 1200 lumen minimum output. Maximum height of 210 mm, minimum length 300 mm.

2.12 Beam Smoke Detector

1. Beam smoke detectors shall consist of receiver and transmitter components each separately powered suitable for protecting the high ceiling areas as shown on the drawings.

2. Provide a remote test station and annunciator. 2.13 Lockable Enclosures

1. All lockable enclosures for fire alarm system control panel, annunciators and transponders must be keyed alike. Provide the owner with five (5) sets of keys at the completion of the project.

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 28 31.00. 01 Toronto, ON MULTIPLEX FIRE ALARM SYSTEM – BASE BUILDING Page 62 2.14 Remote LED

1. High intensity LED lamps electrically connected to device for which unit is to provide remote identification.

2. Mount unit on standard single gang back box. 3. Faceplate to be brushed stainless steel.

2.15 Transponders

1. Transponders shall be configured as single-stage, zoned, non-coded, microprocessor based, indicating, standalone systems functioning as data gathering panels for fire alarm initiating device circuits and as a triple channel emergency voice communication system.

2. The fire alarm transponder’s construction shall be modular in design with solid state microprocessor based electronics. Each transponder microprocessor memory and associated circuitry shall have the ability to detect losses of communication with the control panel CPU that result from defects in the communications circuit wiring.

3. In the event of a loss of communications between the control panel CPU and the transponder, the transponder shall operate on a standalone basis and assume full control over the monitor, speaker and control circuits it supervises. The standalone transponder fire alarm and voice communication control programs must be independent of the main CPU programs but execute the same type of algorithms. Transponder programs shall be completely field programmable with all changes stored in a non-volatile programmable memory.

4. The fire alarm transponder shall allow for loading or editing of special instructions and operating sequences as required. All software operations shall be stored in a non-volatile programmable memory within the fire alarm control panel. Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase the instructions stored in memory. All on site programming changes to the fire alarm system shall be password protected.

5. Each transponder shall house power amplifiers to suit the load required per contract documents plus an additional spare amplifier sized to meet the requirements of the largest amplifier in the system, with automatic transfer on priority. All amplifiers and circuitry to be supervised. Amplifiers to be loaded to 60% capacity.

6. Each transponder shall be capable of chronologically logging and storing 300 events in an alarm log and 300 events in a trouble log. The historical logs shall be stored in the CPU’s memory and shall be protected by a lithium battery that is supervised for a low battery condition. Each recorded event shall include the time and date of that event’s occurrence. The alarm log file must be separate from the trouble log file. It shall be possible for the user to generate a report of both logs upon request.

7. The alarm activation of any initiation circuit shall not prevent the subsequent alarm operation of any other initiation circuit. All alarm receiving circuits shall be configured as follows: 1. Class DCLA wiring, current limited. 2. Capable of powering sixty (60) initiation devices.

8. Not used. 9. Horn circuits and strobe light circuits shall be independently supervised and fused such that a fault on

one circuit shall not affect the operation of any of the other circuits. All signal circuits shall be configured as follows 1. Class B wiring, current limited. 2. Rated at two amps of continuous power.

10. Provide dry contact auxiliary control circuits as follows: 1. DPDT fused 2 amp @ 24vdc, Form C misc. control relays.

11. System expansion modules connected by ribbon cables shall be supervised for module placement. Should a module become disconnected the system trouble indicator must illuminate and audible trouble signal must sound.

12. The transponder shall have provision for disabling and enabling all circuits individually for maintenance or testing purposes. Capability must be password protected.

13. Silent Walktest with History Logging:


1. Each control panel shall be capable of being tested by one person. While in testing mode the alarm activation of an initiating device circuit shall be silently logged as an alarm condition in the historical data file. The panel shall automatically reset itself after logging of the alarm.

2. The momentary disconnection of an initiating or indicating device circuit shall be silently logged as a trouble condition in the historical data file. The panel shall automatically reset itself after logging of the trouble condition.

3. Should the walktest feature be on for an inappropriate amount of time it shall revert to the normal mode automatically.

4. Should an alarm condition occur from an active point, not in walktest mode, it shall perform operations described in System Operation Section.

14. All system controls shall be housed in a surface wall mounted steel cabinet. Finish shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s standards.

15. All modules shall be secured behind hinged locked doors with a full viewing tempered plastic window. The hinged locked door shall give access to all the operating controls but shall not expose live connections.

16. All transponder cabinets are to be properly grounded to building ground. Conduit ground will not be acceptable.

17. Addressable Device Network: 1. The system must provide communication with addressable initiating devices. All of these devices

will be annunciated on the control panel’s main LCD display. Annunciation shall include the following conditions for each point:

1. 80 Character Zone/Device Location 2. Type of Device 3. Detector Status (Normal/Alarm/Trouble) 4. Device Missing/Failed

2. A minimum of 600 addressable devices may be multi-dropped from a single transponder. Systems that require factory reprogramming to add or delete devices are unacceptable.

3. The communication format must be a completely digital poll/response protocol. A high degree of communication reliability must be obtained by using parity data bit error checking routines for address codes and check sum routines for the data transmission portion of the protocol.

4. Each addressable device must be uniquely identified by an address code entered on each device at time of installation.

5. The system shall support 100% of addressable devices in alarm or operated at the same time, under both primary (AC) and secondary (battery) power conditions. Systems which cannot support 100% of their point capacity in alarm simultaneously cannot assure appropriate system response and are not acceptable.

6. The system shall allow a line distance of up to 2,500 feet to the furthest addressable device on a Class A communications circuit. The appropriate quantity of isolator modules shall be installed so that a wiring fault (short, open or ground) within one floor area/fire alarm zone shall not prevent the normal operation of other addressable devices on other floor areas/fire alarm zone.

2.16 Fire Alarm System Software Upgrades

1. Provide the owner with the fire alarm system manufacturer’s latest release software upgrades for three (3) years following substantial completion of this project.

2. Include for in the tender price the cost associated with supplying and installing the software upgrades on an every six months basis.

2.17 Fire Alarm System Monitoring Panel

1. Provide a new CAN/ULC S561-03 listed fire alarm system monitoring panel via digital (analog telephone line) and GSM cellular communications c/w dedicated conduit and analog telephone line.

2. Acceptable manufacturer: 1. Chubb Edwards 2. Tyco

Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation Section 28 31.00. 01 Toronto, ON MULTIPLEX FIRE ALARM SYSTEM – BASE BUILDING Page 64 PART III – EXECUTION 3.1 Installation

1. Install all equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, CSA/ULC-S524, OBC, Electrical Safety Code and these documents.

2. Smoke detectors and multi sensor detectors shall be mounted a minimum of 900 mm from an air supply outlet and 600 mm from an air exhaust outlet. Maintain a clear space of at least 600 mm on the ceiling, below and around smoke and multi sensor detectors.

3. Duct mount smoke detectors shall be installed in the main supply duct, downstream of the mixing box, filters and fan.

4. Install main control panel as indicated and connect to power supply. 5. Install manual alarm stations as indicated and connect to alarm circuits. 6. For smoke detectors in elevator machine rooms, provide additional contacts and wiring to terminate at

the elevator controllers. 7. Install end-of-line devices at the end of signaling circuits as required and locate in room housing

transponder. 8. Install annunciators where indicated and connect to annunciator circuits. 9. Locate and install smoke control fan starter wiring and status wiring for LED’s to indicate fan operating

and damper position. 10. Locate and install sprinkler and standpipe system supervisory, pressure and flow switch wiring where

indicated, and connect to alarm circuits. 11. Make connections to generator trouble, generator running, generator starter in ‘off’ position. 12. Connect wiring to magnetic door holder. 13. Joints in wiring are not allowed. 14. Label conductors at the panel and each junction point, with plastic wire markers indicating, audible or

control circuit number. 15. Be responsible for all wiring to fan damper electro-pneumatic (EP) switches via DVR relays. 16. Supply and install all necessary dual voltage relays in red coloured junction boxes beside each loose

starter, motor control centre, dampers, elevator controllers or annunciation and control of all items as identified in documents. Provide all wiring from fire alarm system to double voltage relays and to items monitored or controlled.

17. For smoke exhaust and pressurization fan control, provide conductors from Form ‘C’ contacts to starters.

18. The type, quantity and size of all fire alarm system component wiring shall be to the manufacturer’s requirements with minimum size being #18 AWG solid.

19. Provide a minimum of two (2) different signal circuits (A and B) per speaker zone loaded to 60% of base amplifier circuit capacity. Signal circuits A and B corresponding to the same speaker zone must be powered from separate amplifiers.

20. T-tapping of circuit wiring is not allowed. 21. Wiring for fire alarm initiating devices and for signaling devices must be in two separate conduit

systems. 22. Surface mount all stairwell and wall mounted devices utilizing EMT conduit and finished manufacturer

surface mounted backboxes. 23. Power requirements for ancillary devices and visual signaling devices must be provided from local

transponder. 24. In mechanical spaces, mount rotating beacons at 8’ AFF. Provide suitable hangers and threaded rod

extensions. 25. Addressable smoke detectors in rooms shall be addressed with respective room number. Addressable

smoke detectors in corridors shall be addressed with the corridor designation. 26. Install and configure all software packages provided to carry out all features specified. 27. Provide all modifications of existing sprinkler devices to accommodate monitoring by the new fire alarm

system.


28. Duct smoke detectors shall be furnished, wired and connected as part of this scope of work. Provide duct opening to install the duct smoke detectors.

3.2 Testing and Certification

1. Arrange with the manufacturer to conduct a complete inspection and test of all installed fire alarm equipment, including all components such as manual pull stations, signaling devices, fire detectors, controls, etc.. Test and verify connections to equipment of other divisions such as sprinkler valves, etc..

2. Once the entire system is fully operational, test and verify the complete life safety system to ensure satisfactory operation in conformance with CAN/ULC S537-M97, ‘Standard for the Verification of Fire Alarm System Installations’. All testing must be witnessed by Owner’s representative prior to acceptance. Tests shall include recording of audibility levels (dB reading) with alarm tone in every corridor and room of the entire Facility.

3. All factory and site testing must be carried out by members in good standing of the Canadian Fire Alarm Association (CFAA).

4. Contractor must be present and witness factory testing of all hardware and software components of the system.

5. Prepare data sheets in duplicate with spaces to record: 1. Date. 2. Manufacturer’s name and system number. 3. Control panel serial number. 4. Transponder serial number(s). 5. Annunciator serial number(s). 6. Testing methodology, results of tests and remedial work undertaken. 7. Signatures of testing and manufacturer’s Engineers indicating concurrence with results of tests and

that some equipment is at site that was factory tested. 6. Prior to verification, thoroughly clean all multisensor and smoke detectors. 7. All verification results shall be recorded onto forms prepared by the Canadian Fire Alarm Association. 8. After the site testing and verification and after all deficiencies have been rectified, notify the Electrical

Consultant and the Fire Department and in their presence demonstrate the proper functioning of the entire system. Include in the Tender Price for 100 percent repeat verification of the complete system including all equipment, components and connections to equipment of other Divisions in the presence of the Fire Department.

9. Provide an approved “Certificate of Verification” to the Electrical Consultant. Display one copy near the control panel and retain a copy with the system documentation. Provide an equipment schedule listing each device and showing confirmation that it was verified.

10. Inspect all equipment installed as part of the system for visible damage or tampering which might interfere with its intended operation.

11. Ensure correct operation of all PA/voice EVAC zones, input and output signal quality and controls. 12. Test annunciator(s) to ensure proper operation, voltage, zoning and visibility of all legends. 13. For all required system testing, inspection and verification, provide qualified personnel to monitor and

operate control panel. In addition, provide a minimum of two (2) qualified personnel to walk with the Fire Department during 100% repeat verification.

3.3 Sequence of Testing and Verification

1. Carry out testing, verification and certification as discussed above as follows: 1. System test in conjunction with the manufacturer. 2. Test and verification in conformance with CAN/ULC S537 (most current edition). 3. Correction of all deficiencies. 4. Submission of test results and audibility levels to Consultant for review including letter of

Certification from the manufacturer. 5. Re-testing and reverification of the complete system in the presence of the Fire Department

(authority having jurisdiction), Consultant and manufacturer’s representative. 6. Correction of any deficiencies noted by the authority having jurisdiction.


7. Submission of manuals with final verification sheets (each verification sheet must be signed by the technician and must include the technician’s CFAA registration number.

3.4 Password

1. At the completion of the verification, change the password for the manufacturer’s programming function.

3.5 Demonstration and Training

1. Provide for twenty four (24) hours of hands on training at the site covering system operations and management. Allow for a minimum of 3 training sessions with each session consisting of 8 personnel each.

2. Training must be carried out by the manufacturer’s representative. 3. Digitally record all training sessions and provide recording to owner on a USB stick(s).

3.6 Additional Deletions

1. In addition to the existing field devices indicated on the drawings to be deleted, include in the tender price to delete 8 additional field devices complete with associated conduit and wiring.

3.7 Additional Devices

1. In addition to the field devices indicated on the drawings to be provided under this contract, include in the tender price to supply and install the following quantities of additional devices complete with 100’-0” of conduit and wiring, programming, testing and certification, labeling, verification and 100% repeat verification for each device:

Quantity of Devices Device Type 2 Manual pull station 4 Multisensor detector head and base 0 Duct smoke detector head and base,

housing and sampling tubes 4 Heat detectors 4 Fire Alarm System Horn 4 Fire Alarm System Strobe light 0 ‘Fire Do Not Enter’ sign (100’ 2-hour

fire rated cable 4 End of line resistor 0 Flame detector 4 Isolator module 4 Initiating device interface and control

modules 40 Program and custom label changes

2. In addition to the devices indicated on the drawings to be provided under this contract, include in the tender

price to supply 10 additional manual pull station glass break rods End of Section

Project:18122

Panelboard: DP-A

Voltage (V):

Phase/Wire:

Bus and Lugs Rating (A):

CCT Load Breaker CCT Load Breaker

NO Amp Pole NO Amp Pole

1 90 2 30

3 4

5 3 6 3

7 30 8 40

9 10

11 3 12 3

13 30 14 60

15 16

17 3 18 3

19 30 20

21 22

23 3 24

25 15 26

27 28

29 3 30

31 100 32

33 34

35 3 36

37 SPARE 15 1 38

39 SPARE 15 1 40

41 SPARE 15 1 42

TVSS

OVERHEAD DOOR - FIRE HALL

SPARE

TR-A DHW-1

DHW-2OVERHEAD DOOR - FIRE HALL

OVERHEAD DOOR - FIRE HALL DP-B

HCC ENGINEERING LIMITED 25/02/2019

Project:18122

Panelboard: DP-B

Voltage (V):

Phase/Wire:




1 40 2

3 4

5 3 6

7 30 8

9 10

11 3 12

13 30 14

15 16

17 3 18

19 20

21 22

23 24

25 15 26

27 28

29 3 30

31 32

33 34

35 36

37 SPARE 15 1 38

39 SPARE 15 1 40

41 SPARE 15 1 42

SPARE

TR-B

OVERHEAD DOOR - EMS

OVERHEAD DOOR - EMS


Project:18122

Panelboard: RP-A

Voltage (V):

Phase/Wire:




1 60 2 100

3 2 4

5 60 6 3

7 2 8 60

9 100 10

11 2 12 3

13 20 14 100

15 2 16

17 EXTERIOR PHOTOCELL / CONTACTOR 15 1 18 3

19 30 20 EF-2 15 1

21 2 22 EF 15 1

23 GFI 24 EF 15 1

25 100 26 AC-1 15 1

27 28 AC-2 15 1

29 3 30 AC-3 15 1

31 100 32 UTILITY METER 20 1

33 34 VOICE MDF BACKBOARD 20 1

35 3 36 HOUSEKEEPING 20 1

37 SPARE 20 1 38 SPARE 15 1

39 SPARE 20 1 40 SPARE 15 1

41 SPARE 20 1 42 SPARE 15 1

RP-AB

RP-AA

CU-3

PANEL A TEMPORARY SERVICE

PANEL B TEMPORARY SERVICE

PANEL C TEMPORARY SERVICEGENERATOR SHORE POWER

UNLABELLED LOAD

CU-1

CU-2


Project:18122

Panelboard: RP-A

Voltage (V):

Phase/Wire:




43 OUTDOOR LIGHTS BAY DR (EX CCT) 15 1 44 20

45 OUTSIDE RECEPTACLE BAY DR (EX CCT) 15 1 46 2

47 TORONTO WATER DCU (EX CCT) 15 1 48 20

49 GEAR ROOM EXHAUST FAN (EX CCT) 15 1 50 2

51 SNOW MELTING CONTROL (EX CCT) 15 1 52 20

53 20 54 2

55 2 56 20

57 20 58 2

59 2 60 GARAGE HEATING CONTROL (EX CCT) 20 1

61 20 62 20

63 2 64

65 20 66 3

67 2 68 TELCO RECEPTACLE 15 1

69 70 TELCO RECEPTACLE 15 1

71 72 MOTORIZED DAMPER 15 1

EX CCT DENOTES CIRCUIT RELOCATED FROM PANEL D AS PART OF THIS SCOPE OF WORK

GFCI BREAKER NOTES REQUIREMENT FOR A GFCI CIRCUIT BREAKER

FRONT SNOW MELTING NORTH BAY

DOORS #1A (EX CCT) GFCI BREAKER

FRONT SNOW MELTING MIDDLE BAY

DOORS #2A (EX CCT) GFCI BREAKER

FRONT SNOW MELTING MODDLE BAY

DOORS #3B (EX CCT) GFCI BREAKER

FRONT SNOW MELTING SOUTH BAY

DOORS #4B (EX CCT) GFCI BREAKER

REAR SNOW MELTING SOUTH BAY

DOORS #5C (EX CCT) GFCI BREAKER

REAR SNOW MELTING MIDDLE BAY

DOORS #6C (EX CCT) GFCI BREAKER

REAR SNOW MELTING MIDDLE BAY

DOORS #7D (EX CCT) GFCI BREAKER

REAR SNOW MELTING NORTH BAY

DOORS #8D (EX CCT) GFCI BREAKER

TRUCK EXHAUST NORTH WALL


Project:18122

Panelboard: RP-AA

Voltage (V):

Phase/Wire:




1 FOYER 103 ACCESS CONTROL 15 1 2 30

3 FOYER 103 DOOR OPERATOR 15 1 4 2

5 FOYER 103 MISC 15 1 6 NEW LAUNDRY 101A MISC 20 1

7 107A RECEPTACLE SINK 20 1 8 APPARATUS BAYS MISC 15 1

9 107A RECEPTACLE CHANGE TABLE 20 1 10 APPARATUS BAYS MISC 15 1

11 107A RECEPTACLE MISC 20 1 12 APPARATUS BAYS MISC 15 1

13 107A DURESS SYSTEM / OPERATOR / LOCK 15 1 14 APPARATUS BAYS MISC 15 1

15 107A SOAP SENSOR 15 1 16 HEATER 15 1

17 18 FAN 15 1

19 20 40

21 22 2

23 24

25 PHONE ROOM 106 15 1 26

27 NEW CAPTAIN OFFICE 109 15 1 28 30

29 NEW CAPTAIN OFFICE 109 15 1 30 2

31 EQUIPMENT 110 20 1 32 40

33 LAVATORY 113 SINK 15 1 34 2

35 LAVATORY 113 SINK 15 1 36

37 SPARE 20 1 38 SPARE 15 1

39 SPARE 20 1 40 SPARE 15 1

41 SPARE 20 1 42 SPARE 15 1

NEW LAUNDRY 101A WASHER/DRYER

FOYER 103 FFH

BBH

VESTIBULE 117 FFH


Project:18122

Panelboard: RP-AA

Voltage (V):

Phase/Wire:




43 COMPRESSOR (EX CCT) TBD 1 44 30

45 EX CCT RELOCATED FROM PANEL A TBD 1 46 2

47 EX CCT RELOCATED FROM PANEL A TBD 1 48




55 20 56

57 2 58

59 20 60

61 2 62

63 EX CCT RELOCATED FROM PANEL A 15 1 64

65 GFI 66

67 EX CCT RELOCATED FROM PANEL A 15 1 68

69 GFI 70 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 20 1

71 EX CCT RELOCATED FROM PANEL A 15 1 72 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 20 1

73 GFI 74 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MONITOR PANEL 15 1

75 STAIR 15 1 76 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MONITOR PANEL 15 1

77 JANITOR CLOSET 15 1 78 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL 15 1

79 24 HOUR AND EMERGENCY LIGHTING 20 1 80

81 LIGHTING 20 1 82 CONTROL CCT 15 1


EX CCT DENOTES CIRCUIT RELOCATED FROM PANEL A AS PART OF THIS SCOPE OF WORK

EX CCT RELOCATED FROM PANEL A

EX CCT RELOCATED FROM PANEL A

BBH


Project:18122

Panelboard: RP-AB

Voltage (V):

Phase/Wire:




1 LIVING 216 MISC (AFCI) 15 1 2 LAVATORY 211 SINK SENSOR 15 1

3 LIVING 216 MISC (AFCI) 15 1 4 LAVATORY 211 SINK RECEPTACLE 20 1

5 FRIDGE (AFCI) 20 1 6 SHOWER RECEPTACLE 20 1

7 FRIDGE (AFCI) 20 1 8 LOCKERS 202 15 1

9 50 10 HANDRYER 30 1

11 2 12

13 RANGE HOOD 15 1 14 NEW DORMITORY (AFCI) 15 1

15 KITCHEN 217 COUNTER (AFCI) 20 1 16 CAPTAIN 209 (AFCI) 15 1

17 KITCHEN 217 COUNTER (AFCI) 20 1 18 STUDY 215 MISC (AFCI) 15 1

19 KITCHEN 217 COUNTER (AFCI) 20 1 20 GYM 210 (AFCI) 15 1

21 KITCHEN 217 COUNTER (AFCI) 20 1 22 GYM 210 (AFCI) 15 1

23 24

25 DORMITORY 219 (AFCI) 15 1 26 30

27 DORMITORY 207 (AFCI) 15 1 28 2

29 HOUSEKEEPING (AFCI) 20 1 30 30

31 32 2

33 STAIR 205 15 1 34 30

35 HOUSEKEEPING (AFCI) 15 1 36 2

37 SPARE 20 1 38 SPARE 15 1

39 SPARE 20 1 40 SPARE 15 1

41 SPARE 20 1 42 SPARE 15 1

AFCI DENOTES BREAKER C/W ARC FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER PROTECTION

BBH

STOVE

BBH

BBH


Project:18122

Panelboard: RP-AB

Voltage (V):

Phase/Wire:




43 WASHROOM FAN (EX CCT) 15 1 44

45 TRUCK CORD REEL (EX CCT) 15 1 46

47 GFI 48

49 EX CCT RELOCATED FROM PANEL B 15 1 50 CONTROL CCT 15 1

51 EX CCT RELOCATED FROM PANEL B 15 1 52 CONTROL CCT 15 1

53 EX CCT RELOCATED FROM PANEL B 15 1 54

55 EX CCT RELOCATED FROM PANEL B 15 1 56

57 58

59 60

61 62

63 64

65 66

67 68

69 70

71 72

73 74

75 76

77 LIGHTING - MECHANICAL LEVEL 20 1 78


81 LIGHTING 20 1 82

83 LIGHTING 20 1 84

EX CCT DENOTES CIRCUIT RELOCATED FROM PANEL B AS PART OF THIS SCOPE OF WORK


Project:18122

Panelboard: RP-BA

Voltage (V):

Phase/Wire:




1 STORAGE ROOM 129B EF 15 1 2 LOCKER ROOM 124 20 1

3 STORAGE ROOM 129B 15 1 4 LOCKER ROOM 124 20 1




11 12

13 KITCHEN 129A FRIDGE 20 1 14 HEATER 15 1

15 KITCHEN 129A 20 1 16 FAN 15 1

17 KITCHEN 129A 20 1 18

19 KITCHEN 129A MW 20 1 20

21 KITCHEN 129A MW 20 1 22 30

23 KITCHEN 129A EF 15 1 24 2

25 KITCHEN 129A CHILLER 15 1 26 GARAGE MISC 15 1

27 KITCHEN 129A HWT 20 1 28

29 30

31 32 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MONITOR PANEL 15 1

33 STORAGE ROOM 129B 15 1 34 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MONITOR PANEL 15 1

35 STORAGE ROOM 129B 15 1 36 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL 15 1

37 SPARE 20 1 38 SPARE 15 1

39 SPARE 20 1 40 SPARE 15 1

41 SPARE 20 1 42 SPARE 15 1

LOCKER ROOM BBH


Project:18122

Panelboard: RP-BA

Voltage (V):

Phase/Wire:




43 EX CCT RELOCATED FROM PANEL C TBD 1 44 KITCHEN MISC 15 1

45 EX CCT RELOCATED FROM PANEL C TBD 1 46 LIVING ROOM 15 1

47 EX CCT RELOCATED FROM PANEL C TBD 1 48 LIVING ROOM 15 1

49 EX CCT RELOCATED FROM PANEL C TBD 1 50



55 56

57 58

59 60

61 62

63 64

65 66

67 68

69 70

71 72

73 74

75 76

77 78




EX CCT DENOTES CIRCUIT RELOCATED FROM PANEL C AS PART OF THIS SCOPE OF WORK


© 2018 Pinchin Ltd.

FINAL Designated Substances Survey Report Toronto Fire Services Station 115 and TPS Station 23 115 Parkway Forest Drive, Toronto, Ontario

Prepared for:

The City of Toronto Facilities Management 55 John Street, 2nd Floor Toronto, Ontario, M5V 3C6

Attention: Sara Reid Environmental Project Manager

December 8, 2017

Pinchin File: 202781

Designated Substances Survey Report December 8, 2017 115 Parkway Forest Drive, Toronto, Ontario Pinchin File: 202781 The City of Toronto FINAL

© 2018 Pinchin Ltd. Page ii

Issued to: Contact: Issued on: Pinchin file: Issuing Office: Primary Contact:

The City of Toronto Sara Reid Environmental Project Manager December 8, 2017 202781 50 Wellington Street East, Suite 200, Toronto, ON M5E 1C8 Andrew Quinn

Author: Charlotte Spelt, B.A. Project Technologist, Hazardous Materials 416.369.6555 ext. 1913 [email protected]

Reviewer: Andrew Quinn, B.Sc. Project Manager, Hazardous Materials 416.368.6555 ext. 1931 [email protected]

Reviewer: Juliette McIntyre Operations Manager, Hazardous Materials 416.368.6555 ext. 1910 [email protected]





© 2018 Pinchin Ltd. Page iii

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

The City of Toronto (Client) retained Pinchin Ltd. (Pinchin) to conduct a Designated Substance survey of

Toronto Fire Services Station 115 and TPS Station 23, located at 115 Parkway Forest Drive, Toronto,

Ontario. The survey was performed on November 9 and 10, 2017.

The objective of the survey was to document any changes in condition and quantity of specified

Designated Substances, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) and mould identified in the previous

Designated Substances Survey (Fisher Environmental Ltd., Project Number FE-P 16-7715), and develop

corrective action plans as required. The results of this survey are not intended for construction,

renovation, demolition or project tendering purposes.

The assessed area consisted of the entire building.The building was occupied at the time of the survey.

SUMMARY OF FINDINGS

Asbestos: Asbestos-containing materials (ACM) were confirmed to be present as follows:

• Vinyl floor tile (VFT01 and VFT03) (tile only).

• Vinyl floor tile (VFT04, VFT05, VFT06 and VFT07) (assumed).

• Drywall joint compound on drywall present as wall and ceiling finish (assumed).

• Roofing materials (assumed).

• Exterior window caulking (assumed).

Lead: Low levels of lead were confirmed to be present in select paints. Lead may be present in

emergency light batteries.

Silica: Crystalline silica is present in concrete, mortar, brick, masonry and ceramics.

Mercury: Mercury vapour may be present in fluorescent lamps.

Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs): PCB-containing materials were not confirmed.

Mould: Mould-impacted materials were not observed.


© 2018 Pinchin Ltd. Page iv

SUMMARY OF RECOMMENDATIONS

The following is a summary of significant recommendations; refer to the body of the report for detailed

recommendations.

1. Perform a pre-construction survey and remove all ACM prior to alteration or maintenance

work or if ACM may be disturbed by the work.

2. Follow appropriate safe work procedures when handling or disturbing asbestos, lead,

mercury and silica.

Please refer to Section 4.0 of this report for detailed recommendations regarding administrative and

remedial actions.

This Executive Summary is subject to the same standard limitations as contained in the report and must be read in conjunction with the entire report.


© 2018 Pinchin Ltd. Page v

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE ....................................................................................................... 1 1.1 Scope of Survey ................................................................................................................... 1

2.0 BACKGROUND INFORMATION ..................................................................................................... 2

2.1 Building Description .............................................................................................................. 2

3.0 FINDINGS ........................................................................................................................................ 2

3.1 Asbestos ............................................................................................................................... 2 3.2 Lead ...................................................................................................................................... 6 3.3 Silica ..................................................................................................................................... 7 3.4 Mercury ................................................................................................................................. 7 3.5 Polychlorinated Biphenyls .................................................................................................... 7 3.6 Mould .................................................................................................................................... 7

4.0 RECOMMENDATIONS .................................................................................................................... 8 4.1 General ................................................................................................................................. 8 4.2 On-going Management and Maintenance ............................................................................ 8

5.0 LIMITATIONS ................................................................................................................................... 9

6.0 REFERENCES ................................................................................................................................. 9

APPENDICES

APPENDIX I Drawings

APPENDIX II-A Asbestos Analytical Certificates (No Information to Report)

APPENDIX II-B Lead Analytical Certificates (No Information to Report)

APPENDIX II-C PCB Analytical Certificates (No Information to Report)

APPENDIX III Methodology APPENDIX IV Survey Form


© 2018 Pinchin Ltd. Page 1 of 9

1.0 INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE

The City of Toronto (Client) retained Pinchin Ltd. (Pinchin) to conduct a Designated Substances Survey of

Toronto Fire Services Station 115 and TPS Station 23, located at 115 Parkway Forest Drive, Toronto,

Ontario.

The survey was performed by Charlotte Spelt, B.A., on November 9 and 10, 2017. The surveyor was

unaccompanied during the survey. The building was occupied at the time of the survey.

The objective of the survey was to document any changes in condition and quantity of specified

Designated Substances, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) and mould identified in the previous

Designated Substances Survey (Fisher Environmental Ltd., Project Number FE-P 16-7715), and develop

corrective action plans as required. This survey is only to be used for the purposes of long term

management and routine maintenance. The results of this survey are not to be used for construction,

renovation, demolition or project tendering purposes.

1.1 Scope of Survey

For the purpose of the survey and this report, hazardous building materials include the following

Designated Substances:

• Asbestos

• Lead

• Silica

• Mercury

The survey also included:

• Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs)

• Mould

The following Ontario Designated Substances are not typically found in building materials in a

composition/state that is hazardous and were not included in this survey:

• Arsenic

• Acrylonitrile

• Benzene

• Coke oven emissions

• Ethylene oxide

• Isocyanates

• Vinyl chloride monomer



2.0 BACKGROUND INFORMATION

2.1 Building Description

Item Details

Building Use Toronto Fire Services station and Toronto Paramedic Services station

Number of Floors/Levels 3 stories

Total Size of Building Approximately 7,872 square feet

Year of Construction 1983

Structure Structural steel, concrete

Exterior Cladding Brick, masonry, metal siding

HVAC HVAC system, forced air

Flooring Vinyl floor tile, ceramic, concrete, carpet, rubber

Interior Walls Drywall, concrete, ceramic, brick

Ceilings Drywall, concrete

3.0 FINDINGS

3.1 Asbestos

3.1.1 Suspect Building Materials Not Found

The following types of building materials may historically contain asbestos but were not observed in the

building and are not discussed in the report findings:

• Spray-applied fireproofing or thermal insulation

• Texture finishes (acoustic/decorative)

• Acoustic ceiling tiles

• Plaster

• Asbestos cement products

• Vinyl sheet flooring



3.1.2 Thermal Systems Insulation (TSI)

3.1.2.1 Pipe Insulation

All pipes observed were either uninsulated or insulated with non-asbestos insulation (e.g. fibreglass).

Photo 1: Pipe insulated with fibreglass in Penthouse (Location

3-02).

Photo 2: Uninsulated pipe in HW Room (Location 1-04).

3.1.2.2 Duct Insulation

Ducts are either uninsulated or insulated with fibreglass and jacketed with either canvas or foil.

Photo 3: Uninsulated duct in Bunker Gear room (Location 1-

08).

Photo 4: Duct insulated with non-asbestos fibreglass and

jacketed in foil in Storage room (Location 1-21).

3.1.2.3 Mechanical Equipment Insulation

Mechanical equipment is either uninsulated or insulated with non-asbestos fibreglass.



Photo 5: Hot water tanks insulated with non-asbestos fibreglass and jacketed in metal in HW Room (Location 1-04).

3.1.3 Drywall Joint Compound

Drywall (gypsum board) and drywall joint compound is present as a wall and ceiling finish in various

locations in the building. Fifteen samples of drywall joint compound were previously collected (samples

16-3465-01, 16-3465-02, 16-3465-03, 16-3465-04, 16-3465-05, 16-3465-06, 15-1814-01, 15-1814-02,

15-1814-03, 15-1814-04, 15-1814-05, 15-1814-06, 14-8604-01, 14-8604-02 and 14-8604-03) and

determined not to contain asbestos.

All drywall joint compound not sampled is assumed to contain asbestos. Drywall joint compound is non-

friable while in place, but can generate friable dust upon removal.

Refer to the Survey Form in Appendix IV for location, quantity and condition of assumed asbestos-

containing drywall joint compound.

3.1.4 Vinyl Floor Tile and Mastic

Vinyl floor tiles and mastic are present as follows:

Size, Pattern, Colour and Photo Number Locations Sample

Number Asbestos Type (tile)

Asbestos Type (mastic)

VFT01, 12” x 12”, beige with grey streaks, Photo 6

See Survey Form in Appendix IV for locations 0002A-C Chrysotile Assumed

VFT02, 12” x 12”, white with beige spots, Photo 7

See Survey Form in Appendix IV for locations 0003A-C None Assumed

VFT03, 12” x 12”, brown with white streaks, Photo 8

See Survey Form in Appendix IV for locations 0004A-C Chrysotile Assumed

VFT04, 12” x 12”, beige mosaic, Photo 9

See Survey Form in Appendix IV for locations

Not Sampled Assumed Assumed



Size, Pattern, Colour and Photo Number Locations Sample

Number Asbestos Type (tile)

Asbestos Type (mastic)

VFT05, 12” x 12”, peach mosaic, Photo 10



VFT06, 12” x 12”, beige with white and brown flecks, Photo 11



VFT07, 12” x 12”, black and white specks, Photo 12



Vinyl floor tiles and mastic are non-friable.

Photo 6: Asbestos-containing VFT01.

Photo 7: Non-asbestos VFT02.

Photo 8: Asbestos-containing VFT03.

Photo 9: Assumed asbestos-containing VFT04.






3.1.5 Assumed Asbestos Materials

A number of materials which might contain asbestos were not sampled during our survey due to

limitations in scope and methodology. Where present, these materials must be assumed to be an

asbestos material and are best sampled during project planning and preparation of contract documents

for their removal. Materials assumed to contain asbestos include:

• Roofing, felts and tar

• Concrete floor levelling compound

• Floor mastics

• Vermiculite in concrete block wall cavities

• Adhesives and duct mastics

• Caulking

• Fire resistant doors

3.2 Lead

3.2.1 Paints

No paint samples were collected from the assessed area during this survey to avoid causing visible

damage to painted finishes.

Beige paint was previously sampled from the Apparatus Bay (Location 1-02) and determined to contain

0.099% lead (sample 16-3465-07), below the City of Toronto action limit of 0.1%.

All other paints were observed in good condition (i.e. not flaking, peeling or delaminating) and are

assumed to contain lead.

3.2.2 Lead Products and Applications

Lead-containing batteries may be present in emergency lighting.



3.3 Silica

Crystalline silica is assumed component of the following building materials where present in the building:

• Poured or pre-cast concrete

• Masonry and mortar

• Ceramic tiles, grout

3.4 Mercury

3.4.1 Lamps

Mercury vapour is present in fluorescent lamps where present in the assessed area.

3.4.2 Mercury-Containing Devices

Mercury-containing devices were not found during the survey.

3.5 Polychlorinated Biphenyls

3.5.1 Lighting Ballasts

Based on visual observations (evidence of T-8 fixtures) the building will not contain PCB ballasts.

3.5.2 Transformers

All transformers in the building are dry type transformers and do not contain PCB-containing dielectric

fluids.

Photo 13: Dry-type transformer in Penthouse (Location 3-01).

3.6 Mould

Visible mould growth was not found in the assessed area.



4.0 RECOMMENDATIONS

4.1 General

Perform a detailed intrusive survey prior to building renovation or demolition operations. The survey

should include; destructive testing (i.e. coring and/or removal of building finishes and components), and

sampling of materials not previously tested (i.e. roofing materials, caulking, mastics).

4.2 On-going Management and Maintenance

The following recommendations are made regarding on-going management and maintenance work

involving the hazardous materials identified.

4.2.1 Asbestos

Perform an assessment of asbestos materials on an annual basis. The next assessment of ACM should

be performed prior to December 2018 to remain in compliance.

Remove all asbestos-containing materials (ACM) prior to alteration or maintenance work or if ACM may

be disturbed by the work. Follow appropriate asbestos precautions for the classification of work being

performed.

Update the asbestos inventory report upon completion of any abatement and removal of asbestos-

containing materials.

4.2.2 Lead

Disturbance of lead in paint and coatings (or other materials) during maintenance activities may result in

over-exposure to lead dust or fumes. The need for work procedures, engineering controls and personal

protective equipment will need to be assessed on a project-by-project basis and must comply with

provincial standards or guidelines. Performing an exposure assessment during work that disturbs lead in

paints and coatings may be able to alleviate the use of some of the precautions specified by these

standards or guidelines.

Lead-containing items should be recycled when taken out of service.

4.2.3 Silica

Disturbance of silica-containing products during maintenance activities may result in excessive exposures

to airborne silica, especially if performed indoors and dry. Cutting, grinding, drilling or demolition of

materials containing silica should be completed only with proper respiratory protection and other worker

safety precautions that comply with provincial standards or guidelines.



4.2.4 Mercury

Recycle and reclaim mercury from fluorescent light tubes when taken out of service. Do not break lamps.

Light tubes are accepted free of charge at many local recycling depots.

5.0 LIMITATIONS

The work performed by Pinchin was conducted in accordance with the City of Toronto, Blanket Contract

#47020968.

6.0 REFERENCES

The following legislation and documents were referenced in completing the survey and this report:

1. Asbestos on Construction Projects and in Buildings and Repair Operations, Ontario

Regulation 278/05.

2. Designated Substances, Ontario Regulation 490/09.

3. Lead on Construction Projects, Ministry of Labour Guidance Document.

4. Ministry of the Environment Regulation, R.R.O. 1990 Reg. 347 as amended.

5. Surface Coating Materials Regulations, SOR/2005-109, Hazardous Products Act.

6. Silica on Construction Projects, Ministry of Labour Guidance Document.

7. Alert – Mould in Workplace Buildings, Ontario Ministry of Labour.

8. Standard Operating Procedures for Designated Substance Surveys, dated April, 2014,

City of Toronto, Facilities Management. \\pinchin.com\miss\Job\202000s\0202781.000 CITYOFTORONTO,Fire,DSUB,ASSMT\Deliverables\Locations\115 Parkway Forest Drive\Deliverables\Final\202781_FINAL DSS_115 Parkway Forest Dr, Toronto_2017.docx Template: Master Report City of Toronto, 2016 Designated Substance Survey, Haz, April 21, 2016

APPENDIX I Drawings

PINCHIN LOCATION NUMBERX

NOT ALL KNOWN OR SUSPECTED DESIGNATED SUBSTANCES MAY BE DEPICTED ON THE DRAWING. REFER TO THE DESIGNATED SUBSTANCE SURVEY REPORT FOR A COMPLETE LIST OF KNOWN AND SUSPECTED DESIGNATED SUBSTANCES.

LEGEND IS COLOUR DEPENDENT.

NON-COLOUR COPIES MAY ALTER

INTERPRETATION.

ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIAL

TEMPLATE SPACING

UP

UP

1-13

1-01

1-12

1-11

1-10

1-09

1-02

1-08

1-07

1-06

1-03

1-17

1-18

1-19

1-16

1-15

1-04

1-20

1-051-21

1-14

DATE:

DRAWN BY:

LOCATION:

CHECKED BY:

CLIENT:

PROJECT # :

DRAWING:

TITLE:

LEGEND:

SCALE:

NTS

CITY OF TORONTO

TORONTO FIRE STATION 115 & TPS 23

115 PARKWAY FOREST DRIVE

TORONTO, ONTARIO

DESIGNATED SUBSTANCE

SURVEY

GROUND FLOOR

2017/11/20

VB

CS

202781

1 OF 2

SECOND FLOOR

THIRD FLOOR

DOWN

UP

DOWN

DOWN

2-08

2-07

2-09

1-05

1-05

3-02

1-07

3-01

2-10

2-06

2-13

2-01

2-03

2-02

2-12

2-04

2-11

2-05

1-01

1-01

2-07

PINCHIN LOCATION NUMBERX

NOT ALL KNOWN OR SUSPECTED DESIGNATED SUBSTANCES MAY BE DEPICTED ON THE DRAWING. REFER TO THE DESIGNATED SUBSTANCE SURVEY REPORT FOR A COMPLETE LIST OF KNOWN AND SUSPECTED DESIGNATED SUBSTANCES.

LEGEND IS COLOUR DEPENDENT.

NON-COLOUR COPIES MAY ALTER

INTERPRETATION.

ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIAL

DATE:

DRAWN BY:

LOCATION:

CHECKED BY:

CLIENT:

PROJECT # :

DRAWING:

TITLE:

LEGEND:

SCALE:

NTS

CITY OF TORONTO

TORONTO FIRE STATION 115 & TPS 23

115 PARKWAY FOREST DRIVE

TORONTO, ONTARIO

DESIGNATED SUBSTANCE

SURVEY

2ND & 3RD FLOORS

2017/11/20

VB

CS

202781

2 OF 2

APPENDIX II-A Asbestos Analytical Certificates

(No Information to Report)

APPENDIX II-B Lead Analytical Certificates


APPENDIX II-C PCB Analytical Certificates


APPENDIX III Methodology

Designated Substances Survey Report December 8, 2017 The City of Toronto Pinchin File: 202781 Methodology Appendix III


1.0 GENERAL

The following survey methodology is based on the requirements of the Standard Operation Procedure for

Designated Substance Surveys, dated April, 2014, provided by the City of Toronto (the “SOP”).

Pinchin conducted a room-by-room survey (rooms, corridors, service areas, exterior, etc.) to identify the

hazardous building materials as defined in Section 1.1. Information regarding the approximate quantity,

location, and condition of hazardous building materials encountered and visually estimated quantities

were recorded on the Survey Form, provided by the City of Toronto, found in Appendix V. The locations

of any samples collected were recorded on small-scale plans, found in Appendix I.

Drawings (i.e., floor plans), previous reports, and Survey Forms, were referenced where provided.

1.1 Limitations on Scope

The survey excludes the following:

• Owner or occupant articles (e.g. stored items, furniture, appliances, etc.);

• Underground materials or equipment (e.g. vessels, drums, underground storage tanks,

pipes, etc.);

• Building envelope, structural components, inaccessible or concealed materials or other

items where sampling may cause consequential damage to the property.

• Energized systems (e.g. internal boiler components, elevators, mechanical or electrical

components);

• Controlled products (e.g. stored chemicals, operational or process-related substances);

and

• Materials not typically associated with construction (e.g. settled dust, spills, residual

contamination from prior spills, etc.).

The survey was limited to non-intrusive testing. Concealed spaces such as those above solid ceilings and

within shafts and pipe chases were accessed via existing access panels only. Pinchin did not conduct

demolition of walls, solid ceilings, structural items, interior finishes or exterior building finishes, to

determine the presence of concealed materials.

1.2 Asbestos

Pinchin conducted an inspection for the presence of friable and non-friable asbestos-containing materials

(ACM). A friable material is a material that when dry can be crumbled, pulverized or powdered by hand

pressure.



Pinchin collected samples at a rate that is in compliance with Table 1 of O.Reg. 278/05. A separate set of

samples was collected of each of homogenous material sampled. A homogenous material is defined by

the US EPA1 as material that is uniform in texture and appearance, was installed at one time, and is

unlikely to consist of more than one type or formulation of material. The homogeneous materials are

determined by visual examination, available information on the phases of the construction and prior

renovations.

The following materials were sampled:

• All friable materials historically known to contain asbestos, regardless of year of

installation, not identified in previous reports;

• Friable materials previously sampled in insufficient quantity to conclude the materials are

non-asbestos, in accordance with the requirements of O.Reg. 278/05;

• Friable materials previously reported to contain less than 1% asbestos, if sampled prior to

the Ministry of Labour defining an asbestos-containing material as a material containing

contains 0.5 percent or more asbestos by weight;

• Non-friable acoustic ceiling tiles;

• Non-friable vinyl floor tiles and mastic.

The following materials were not sampled:

• Materials previously identified in previous reports provided as asbestos-containing;

• Materials previously confirmed to be non-asbestos in accordance with O.Reg. 278/05;

• Unless damaged the following materials were not sampled: plaster, drywall joint

compound, mastic, window caulking, roofing materials, vinyl sheet flooring. Materials not

sampled are assumed to contain asbestos.

• Materials where sampling poses an inherent, imminent danger to the Assessor such as

high voltage wiring, materials present at heights greater than 12 feet, or those in confined

spaces. These materials are assumed to be asbestos-containing.

In some cases, manufactured products such as asbestos cement pipe are visually identified without

sample confirmation.

1 Environmental Protection Agency



Pinchin submits the bulk samples to a NVLAP2 accredited laboratory for analysis. The analysis is

performed in accordance with Test Method EPA/600/R-93/116: Method for the Determination of Asbestos

in Bulk Building Materials, July 1993.

The asbestos analysis is completed using a stop positive approach. Only one result of greater than the

regulated criteria (0.5%) is required to determine that a material is asbestos-containing, but all samples

must be analyzed to conclusively determine that a material is non-asbestos. The laboratory stops

analyzing samples from a homogeneous material once a result greater than the regulated criteria is

detected in any of the samples of that material. All samples of a homogeneous material are analyzed if no

asbestos is detected. In some cases, all samples are analyzed in the sample set regardless of result.

Where building materials are described in the report as non-asbestos, or described as containing no

asbestos, this is subject to the limitations of the analytical method used, and should be understood to

mean no asbestos was detected.

Asbestos materials are evaluated in order to make recommendations regarding remedial work. The

priority for remedial action is based on several factors:

• Friability (friable or non-friable).

• Condition (good, fair, poor, debris, based on definitions in the SOP).

• Accessibility (ranking from accessible to all building users to inaccessible).

• Visibility (whether the material is obscured by other building components).

• Efficiency of the work (for example, if damaged ACM is being removed in an area, it may

be most practical to remove all ACM in the area even if it is in good condition).

This includes friability, condition and efficiency and practicality of the work.

1.3 Lead

Pinchin collected samples of damaged paint not identified in a previous report. Drawings included show

sample locations.

Analysis for lead in paints or surface coatings is performed in accordance with EPA Method No.

3050B/Method No. 7420; flame atomic absorption at an accredited laboratory.

For this report, all paints containing lead at a concentration 0.1% or greater are discussed. Paint was

evaluated for condition.

Lead building products (e.g. batteries, lead sheeting, flashing) are identified by visual observation only.

2 National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program



1.4 Silica

Pinchin identifies building materials suspected of containing crystalline silica (e.g. concrete, cement, tile,

brick, masonry, mortar) by knowledge of current and historic applications and visual inspection only.

Pinchin does not perform sampling of these materials for laboratory analysis of crystalline silica content.

1.5 Mercury

Building materials/products/equipment (e.g. thermostats, barometers, pressure gauges, light tubes),

suspected to contain mercury were identified by visual inspection only. Dismantling of equipment

suspected of containing mercury was not performed. Sampling of these materials for laboratory analysis

of mercury content was not performed.

Mercury spills or damaged mercury-containing equipment was recorded where observed.

1.6 Polychlorinated Biphenyls

Pinchin determines the potential for light ballast and wet transformers to contain PCBs based on the age

of the building, a review of maintenance records and examination of labels or nameplates on equipment,

where present and accessible. The information is compared to known ban dates of PCBs and

Environment Canada publications.

Dry type transformers are assumed to be free of dielectric fluids and hence non-PCB.

Pinchin records spills or leakage of suspect PCB-containing fluids where observed.

Fluids (mineral oil, hydraulic or Askaral) in transformers or other equipment are not sampled for PCB

content.

Non-liquid forms of PCBs (i.e. sealants or caulking) are not sampled for PCB content.

1.7 Visible Mould

Pinchin identifies the presence of mould if visibly present in a significant quantity on exposed building

surfaces. If any mould growth is concealed within wall cavities it is not addressed in this survey.

APPENDIX IV Survey Form

APPENDIX IV - SURVEY FORM

Toronto Fire Station 115 and EMS Station 23

Name of Surveyor:

Location

NumberLocation Name

Building

SystemMaterial Observed

Potential Hazardous

MaterialSample ID Analytical Result

Qu

an

tity

Co

nd

itio

n

Notes / Recommended Actions

0-00 Exterior Roof Roofing Material Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 6350 SF Good

0-00 Exterior Windows Window Caulking Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed All Good

0-00 Exterior Walls Brick N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-01 Foyer / Stairwell Floor Ceramic N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-01 Foyer / Stairwell Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos 0002A-C 0.5-5% Chrysotile 70 SF GoodVFT01, 12” x 12”, Beige with grey streaks

*From Pinchin Pre-Reno, Oct 2012**On stairs

1-01 Foyer / Stairwell Walls Drywall (DJC) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 355 SF Good

1-01 Foyer / Stairwell Walls Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-01 Foyer / Stairwell Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 270 SF Good

1-01 Foyer / Stairwell Pipe Uninsulated N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-02 Fire Apparatus Bay Floor Concrete N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-02 Fire Apparatus Bay Walls Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-02 Fire Apparatus Bay Walls Paint Lead 16-3465-07* 0.099% N/A N/ABeige paint on walls*From Fisher Project No. 16-7647, dated February 2016

1-02 Fire Apparatus Bay Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos 16-3465-01 to 03* None Detected N/A N/A *From Fisher Project No. 16-7647, dated February 2016

1-02 Fire Apparatus Bay Pipe Uninsulated N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-02 Fire Apparatus Bay Pipe Fibreglass N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-02 Fire Apparatus Bay Duct Uninsulated N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-02 Fire Apparatus Bay Duct Fibreglass N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-03 Men's Washroom Floor Ceramic N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-03 Men's Washroom Walls Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Date(s) of Current Reassessment:

Organization Completing Reassessment:

Date(s) of Original Survey:

Pinchin Ltd.

Building Address:

C. Spelt

Building Name:

November 9, 2017

NOTES:N/A

August 1, 2007

Original Survey Conducted By:

115 Parkway Forest Drive

ECOH Management Inc.

TORONTO FIRE STATION 115 AND TORONTO EMS STATION 23115 PARKWAY FOREST DRIVE, TORONTO, ONTARIO PAGE 1 of 7


Location

NumberLocation Name

Building


Potential Hazardous


Qu

an

tity

Co

nd

itio

n


1-03 Men's Washroom Walls Ceramic N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-03 Men's Washroom Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos 14-8604-03* None Detected N/A N/A *From Fisher Project No.14-6933, dated May 2014.

1-04 HW Room Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos 0002A-C 0.5-5% Chrysotile 60 SF Good VFT01, 12” x 12”, Beige with grey streaks

*From Pinchin Pre-Reno, Oct 2012

1-04 HW Room Walls Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-04 HW Room Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos 14-8604-01 and 02* None Detected N/A N/A *From Fisher Project No.14-6933, dated May 2014.

1-04 HW Room Pipe Uninsulated N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-04 HW Room Pipe Fibreglass N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-04 HW Room Mechanical Fibreglass N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Hot water tank (x2)

1-05 Stairwell Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos 0002A* 0.5-5% Chrysotile 260 SF Good VFT01, 12” x 12”, Beige with grey streaks


1-05 Stairwell Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 1 SF Good VFT04, 12" x 12", Beige Mosaic

1-05 Stairwell Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 5 SF Good VFT06, 12" x 12", Beige with White and Brown Flecks *At doorway

1-05 Stairwell Floor Rubber N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A *on stairs

1-05 Stairwell Walls Drywall (DJC) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 65 SF Good

1-05 Stairwell Walls Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-05 Stairwell Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos 15-1814-04 to 06* None Detected N/A N/A *From Fisher Project No.15-7315, dated May 2015.

1-06 Pole Hole Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos 0002A-C 0.5-5% Chrysotile 20 SF Good VFT01, 12” x 12”, Beige with grey streaks


1-06 Pole Hole Walls Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-06 Pole Hole Ceiling Concrete N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-07 Hose Tower Floor Concrete N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-07 Hose Tower Walls Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-07 Hose Tower Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos14-8604-01 to 0315-1814-04 to 0616-3465-01 to 03

None Detected N/A N/A

1-07 Hose Tower Duct Uninsulated N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-08 Bunker Gear Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos 0002A-C 0.5-5% Chrysotile 145 SF Good VFT01, 12” x 12”, Beige with grey streaks


1-08 Bunker Gear Walls Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A



Location

NumberLocation Name

Building


Potential Hazardous


Qu

an

tity

Co

nd

itio

n


1-08 Bunker Gear Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos14-8604-01 to 0315-1814-04 to 0616-3465-01 to 03


1-09 Laundry Room Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos 0002A-C 0.5-5% Chrysotile 130 SF Good VFT01, 12” x 12”, Beige with grey streaks


1-09 Laundry Room Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 5 SF Good VFT06, 12" x 12", Beige with White and Brown Flecks *At doorway

1-09 Laundry Room Walls Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-09 Laundry Room Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos14-8604-01 to 0315-1814-04 to 0616-3465-01 to 03


1-09 Laundry Room Pipe Uninsulated N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-09 Laundry Room Pipe Fibreglass N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-10 Front Office Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos 0003A-C* None Detected N/A N/A VFT02, 12” x 12”, White with beige spots


1-10 Front Office Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 15 SF Good VFT04, 12" x 12", Beige Mosaic

1-10 Front Office Walls Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-10 Front Office Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos14-8604-01 to 0315-1814-04 to 0616-3465-01 to 03


1-11 Office Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos 0003A-C None Detected N/A N/A VFT02, 12” x 12”, White with beige spots


1-11 Office Walls Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-11 Office Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos14-8604-01 to 0315-1814-04 to 0616-3465-01 to 03


1-12 Pole Hole Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos 0003A-C None Detected N/A N/A VFT02, 12” x 12”, White with beige spots




1-13 Foyer Entrance Floor Ceramic N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-13 Foyer Entrance Floor Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-13 Foyer Entrance Walls Drywall (DJC) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 80 SF Good

1-13 Foyer Entrance Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos14-8604-01 to 0315-1814-04 to 0616-3465-01 to 03


1-14 EMS Apparatus Bay Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos 0002A-C 0.5-5% Chrysotile 28 SF GoodVFT01, 12” x 12”, Beige with grey streaks

*From Pinchin Pre-Reno, Oct 2012**On stairs

1-14 EMS Apparatus Bay Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 2 SF Good VFT05, 12" x 12", Peach Mosaic



Location

NumberLocation Name

Building


Potential Hazardous


Qu

an

tity

Co

nd

itio

n


1-14 EMS Apparatus Bay Walls Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-14 EMS Apparatus Bay Ceiling Concrete N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-14 EMS Apparatus Bay Pipe Uninsulated N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-14 EMS Apparatus Bay Pipe Fibreglass N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-14 EMS Apparatus Bay Duct Uninsulated N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-15 Kitchen / Lounge Floor Carpet N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-15 Kitchen / Lounge Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos 0002A-C 0.5-5% Chrysotile 300 SF Good VFT01, 12” x 12”, Beige with grey streaks


1-15 Kitchen / Lounge Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos 0004A-C* 0.5-5% Chrysotile 240 SF Good VFT03, 12” x 12”, Brown with white streaks


1-15 Kitchen / Lounge Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 6 SF Good VFT07, 12" x 12", Black with white specks

1-15 Kitchen / Lounge Walls Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-15 Kitchen / Lounge Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos14-8604-01 to 0315-1814-04 to 0616-3465-01 to 03


1-16 Lockers Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos 0002A-C 0.5-5% Chrysotile 105 SF Good VFT01, 12” x 12”, Beige with grey streaks


1-16 Lockers Walls Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-16 Lockers Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos14-8604-01 to 0315-1814-04 to 0616-3465-01 to 03


1-17 Shower Floor Ceramic N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-17 Shower Walls Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-17 Shower Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos14-8604-01 to 0315-1814-04 to 0616-3465-01 to 03


1-18 Washroom Floor Ceramic N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-18 Washroom Walls Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-18 Washroom Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos14-8604-01 to 0315-1814-04 to 0616-3465-01 to 03




1-19 Washroom Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos14-8604-01 to 0315-1814-04 to 0616-3465-01 to 03




Location

NumberLocation Name

Building


Potential Hazardous


Qu

an

tity

Co

nd

itio

n


1-20 Rear Entrance Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos 0002A-C 0.5-5% Chrysotile 19 SF Good VFT01, 12” x 12”, Beige with grey streaks


1-20 Rear Entrance Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 1 SF Good VFT05, 12" x 12", Peach Mosaic

1-20 Rear Entrance Walls Drywall (DJC) Asbestos 15-1814-01 to 03* None Detected N/A N/A *From Fisher Project No.15-7315, dated May 2015.

1-20 Rear Entrance Walls Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-20 Rear Entrance Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos14-8604-01 to 0315-1814-04 to 0616-3465-01 to 03


1-21 Storage Floor Concrete N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-21 Storage Walls Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-21 Storage Walls Brick N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1-21 Storage Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos14-8604-01 to 0315-1814-04 to 0616-3465-01 to 03


1-21 Storage Duct Fibreglass N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

2-01 Kitchen / Lounge Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos 0002A-C 0.5-5% Chrysotile 250 SF Good VFT01, 12” x 12”, Beige with grey streaks


2-01 Kitchen / Lounge Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos 0004A-C* 0.5-5% Chrysotile 260 SF Good VFT03, 12” x 12”, Brown with white streaks


2-01 Kitchen / Lounge Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 30 SF Good VFT04, 12" x 12", Beige Mosaic

2-01 Kitchen / Lounge Walls Drywall (DJC) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 30 SF Good

2-01 Kitchen / Lounge Walls Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

2-01 Kitchen / Lounge Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 540 SF Good

2-01 Kitchen / Lounge Duct Uninsulated N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

2-02 Fitness Room Floor Rubber Tile N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

2-02 Fitness Room Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos 0002B-C* 0.5-5% Chrysotile 110 SF Good VFT01, 12” x 12”, Beige with grey streaks


2-02 Fitness Room Walls Drywall (DJC) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 140 SF Good

2-02 Fitness Room Walls Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

2-02 Fitness Room Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 920 SF Good

2-03 Storage Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos 0002A-C 0.5-5% Chrysotile 50 SF Good VFT01, 12” x 12”, Beige with grey streaks


2-03 Storage Walls Drywall (DJC) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 30 SF Good

2-03 Storage Walls Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A



Location

NumberLocation Name

Building


Potential Hazardous


Qu

an

tity

Co

nd

itio

n


2-03 Storage Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 50 SF Good

2-04 Corridor Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos 0002A-C 0.5-5% Chrysotile 200 SF Good VFT01, 12” x 12”, Beige with grey streaks


2-04 Corridor Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 4 SF Good VFT06, 12" x 12", Beige with White and Brown Flecks

2-04 Corridor Walls Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

2-04 Corridor Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 200 SF Good




2-05 Pole Hole Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 15 SF Good





2-07 Corridor Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos 0002A-C 0.5-5% Chrysotile 130 SF Good VFT01, 12” x 12”, Beige with grey streaks


2-07 Corridor Walls Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

2-07 Corridor Ceiling Concrete N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

2-08 Bedroom Floor Carpet N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

2-08 Bedroom Walls Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

2-08 Bedroom Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 145 SF Good

2-09 Bedroom Floor Rubber Tile N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A





2-10 Washroom Walls Ceramic N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

2-10 Washroom Ceiling Concrete N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

2-11 Bedroom Floor Carpet N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A




Location

NumberLocation Name

Building


Potential Hazardous


Qu

an

tity

Co

nd

itio

n



2-12 Housekeeping Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos 0002A-C 0.5-5% Chrysotile 20 SF Good VFT01, 12” x 12”, Beige with grey streaks


2-12 Housekeeping Walls Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

2-12 Housekeeping Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 20 SF Good

2-12 Housekeeping Duct Fibreglass N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A


2-13 Washroom Walls Drywall (DJC) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 80 SF Good

2-13 Washroom Walls Ceramic N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

2-13 Washroom Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 60 SF Good

3-01 Penthouse Floor Concrete N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

3-01 Penthouse Walls Drywall (DJC) Asbestos 16-3465-04 to 06* None Detected N/A N/A *From Fisher Project No. 16-7647, dated February 2016

3-01 Penthouse Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 380 SF Good

3-01 Penthouse Pipe Uninsulated N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

3-01 Penthouse Pipe Fibreglass N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

3-01 Penthouse Duct Uninsulated N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

3-01 Penthouse Mechanical Uninsulated N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Dry-type transformer

3-01 Penthouse Mechanical Uninsulated N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A HVAC system (x3)

3-02 Penthouse Vestibule Floor Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) Asbestos 0002A-C 0.5-5% Chrysotile 20 SF Good VFT01, 12” x 12”, Beige with grey streaks


3-02 Penthouse Vestibule Walls Concrete Block N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

3-02 Penthouse Vestibule Ceiling Drywall (DJC) Asbestos Not Sampled ACM Assumed 20 SF Good


Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation · 2019-04-04 · Work Restrictions Specifications and...

Documents

Transcript of Fire Hall 115 and EMS Station 23 Renovation · 2019-04-04 · Work Restrictions Specifications and...